Home

2011 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual

1. sss 94 Instrument Cluster 3 44 sks REA XAR OPERA 265 Instrument Panel and Controls 264 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 025 Integrated Power Module Fuses 529 Interior Appearance Care ss ice sade vag cane es 524 enor LENE 2224 5 2093 PAR DERE HEER ER DE 152 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 154 Introduction oe een RARR ELE URE RAKA Eds 4 Inverter Power 4444444 6 sued be EG G3 3 4 di os 164 Jack LOCaAON e443 6444 00 8 eho ee eee eay a 478 Jack Operation 2 424586 eon R HA erm das 477 480 481 Jacking Instructions uus sce dye aue RR DE 480 JOM Stare nace ees oP d does ae b BARE ane S 483 Key PTOCTAMMUNG 44424554408 BREER EE Ed RE is ker kepce menl 2 e x ur8 924p rpt ES RE Dd 16 Key bentcy IamobIlIZeb ss ske Ord HR ERK o 15 ker li Remunder sisie sari eis eri OE HOED R oa 15 Keyless Entry System lt s vos SEER P 1 398 eri 21 14 Lane Change and Turn Signals 267 Lane Change Assist o 4534255 Ra d ee EER debes 150 Lap Dels CODO 43 Lap Shoulder Dells a5 sus Bek eee RR can tend 43 578 INDEX NEE Id LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 74 76 Es EE EE PES ORES CERE GS REA 87 Lead Free Gasoline 0 0000 eae 444 Leaks PRG oase este x ao E EP RS Pd ES EA 87 LIS DE Dalk us erar sues esce EG RR EA EENES ES 87 Bid so 4 seg ence eee hin ces apse et eee 87 148 DAE PPM VER OAR OG AE 64 68 85 270 PIC
2. 24 O Programming Additional Transmitters 24 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN ed O General Information x 204 REKE PERSE SEE 24 D Transmitter Battery Replacement 25 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 26 o How Io Use Remote Start 155 rw 26 WEG oi ses dk oe eh EER EE DRS DIS OS 28 D Upper Half Door Window Removal Il DOUIDDEL uri ter VEA 989 7239 929 riti 29 o Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped O Front Door Removal 2 222229 9x39 29 D Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 31 lg Door Locks SS SS SS SS See 33 El Manual Door Locks 244524442 40e e052 ua 33 O Power Door Locks If Equipped 34 H Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 35 O Automatic Door Loeks uiae 69 mo SR 36 D Child Protection Door Lock System Neat Doors ss ss de RED d GER eeu Bae acis oF IM Windows oo ea das xod cte ete ER 38 O Power Windows If Equipped 38 E Mind Dale ues de us eid one P RATE 40 la Rear Swing Gate ss SEE Es es ee 40 ll Occupant Restraints 0005 41 Hap Shoulder Belts 2522 k 6456240958 43 O Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout Four Door Models Only 48 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 49 o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 50 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 O Energy Management Feature ol H Event Data Recorder EDR 22
3. 4 Disconnect the knuckles from the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a 130 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place d y fi 035605928 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installa tion in this section Installing the Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and at
4. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The engine oil level should be checked five minutes after a warmed up engine has been shut off Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months whichever occurs first N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the Ameri
5. Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In l l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the A Geet memos recording you may press the Voice Command vr System Setup button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup you may say on of the the following commands following Save to save the memo e Change to system setup Continue to continue recording e Main menu system setup Delete to delete the recording e Switch to system setup e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Change to setup During the playback you may press the Voice Command vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands Switch to setup e Main menu setup or Repeat to repeat a memo In this mode you may say the following commands Next to play the next memo e Language English N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 e Language French
6. INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 11JK72 126 AC Third Edition Printed in U S A
7. 562 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 562 Hn Medco Contactes 2a a ES AD RAS uai 562 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 563 A Seve CONOCI me messie we se see RA 2 563 W Warranty Information 564 EM MOPAR Parts ossi ee REEN 564 Bl Reporting Safety Defects 564 O In The 50 United States And Washington BENE OM oe ee eee ee ee ee O In Canada N Publication Order Forms 560 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN id lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire E DOChOB Grades 45445445 cem Posee KUR RE 567 SLE ecu P ee 067 E Treadwear se te eae od CESSES HESS EES 567 Temperate Grades sins oe ee RE 3 568 NN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 561 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must h
8. 317 Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 310 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 91 O Info Button D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 310 And MP3 die Play uico isie a oye oan AR 320 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio O Notes On Playing MP3 Files 322 If Equipped ee ee ee ee ee ee 312 D Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 325 N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 W Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio W Steering Wheel Audio Controls 342 Sales Code RES RSC 0 200008 326 ERROR Lr er ed TENER Ee ee es 349 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 326 OCD Player 343 reece Ven g Bd d oa MCD DVD Disc Maintenance 343 7 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 334 ll Radio Operation And Mobile Phones 4 List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 336 B Climate Controls 0 SS Es D Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 336 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 344 D Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio 7 SER 2C a AC ec 348 I EOUIDDOd ss uicina 99 ak ome SEER 337 A ee ee gas quias HO petalins TIS 2 4 94 4 BEE PEER E is 354 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES A L 9 s OOO 9 040133797 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Power Outlet 3 Radio 9 Lower Switch Bank
9. The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from the
10. 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely e The following table shows examples on how to calcu exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities calculated in Step 4 of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 426 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib of Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupaffi amp 100 Ibs 865 Ibs U 70 BEE 195 Ibs Pu ama ee Es Dre Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 lbs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs a c Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 ibs 400 Ibs 465 I
11. 540 Foe dig EE wie boon RD 9 aat BA RR DERS 537 PLONE si oie vto SEER ER RE S 150 537 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 143 Folding Rear DEED sata Grea boeken 145 Folding Windshield s2 i42445e e eens fa RSS 251 Four Wheel Drive 44s4 54 4 4 66446445 375 PUNE OR AA AA AA OE OO EE OE EN 377 Four Wheel Drive Operation a 24 64444444 ES 9 9 Four Way Hazard Flasher iua one ve RR OR 4 476 Fre ing A St ck Vehicle usa oo da santa e ne ed 487 Front Axle Differential 521 RE RT ER a RT ER Ad ie dn eo P TE EE EE 445 Piller Cap Gas Cap oues ddp SERE ORE 449 ert C 444 frop APP yeee AEE e ER 266 Materiale Added u 2s posce d earn repari tiris 446 iss daria ro es E PL 445 rera Pm H4 NEQUINCMICING iss a a ceed GE oe ns 539 Tank Capac x 44 nas EDELE BRA V4 ees 539 Fuel System CAulofl ias doa qe a dus 447 449 loo TIPP 929 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap asoa ee RE EE 449 450 496 Gasoline Duel equi ees BREER ks 444 576 INDEX NEE URSI Gasoline Reformulated 444 Gauges Coolant Temperaire sosa ias ee ded EE ER 241 EE EET RR nee eee SUE TUNE E UE 266 Odoideler sa be T AE EE SE DO ae ee 274 sers oiii Er 266 Tachometr a xus seca eee ee RAAI n gare 270 Gear KANDES Pr 367 371 Gear Select Lever Override v secs wee pee 3 d 9 es 489 General Information 18 128 443 lies Cl un so ot bee teehee T 525 Gross Axle Weight Rating 451 454 Gross Veh
12. INTRODUCTION Z rri X REEDE e e Ls Le UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e sesse sesse sesse sesse sesse STARTING AND OPERATING 4 ee dees seed 40665554 see Ee UR Rose ged dee ee N TABLE OF CONTENTS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ss sesse ee esse ses ttn UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ese es ssssss ss sesse see CONTENTS B Introduction INTRODUCTION B Rollover Warning leere Mi How To Use This Manual 4 W Warnings And Cautions 5 i Vehicle Identification Number 6 W Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION NEE Id INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle it can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on diffe
13. The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will Seek up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will Seek down for the next listenable station N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343 The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The center button on the left side rocker switch has no function for a single disc CD player However when a multiple disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle the center button will select the next available CD in the player CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner
14. The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353 e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to tu
15. ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Gear Ranges NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 10 F 23 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first then place the shift lever in the PARK position WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than the idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal 372 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL
16. 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked e Tutorial engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only 3 e Language Spanish e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep SEATS before speaking the Barge In commands Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog WARNING nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or i outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in 1 Press the Voice Command VR button say System these areas are more likely to be seriously injured Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice or killed Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition Continued 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not eguipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed
17. 348 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 270 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 74 AIDE S SIE MING cs ema T ee CORRIERE PR 19 Th System Disarming so ecco vier Sax ORE E 19 N INDEX 585 dil toet COMM 2st RS RES RE LLE ee es 156 Tip Slant oo ro 363 Tire and Loading Information Placard 423 Tire Identification Number TIN 421 Tite Manes Lau 233 vus RE sea as Ve 418 Tire Safety Information ssas 22 39 ORE AAK 445 418 Ties CT 87 427 567 uda 644484044 rm 428 iii 4 egw AE EET ETOS OE ves 436 CHANGIN soas Gea a ah ES HARE RAPER IR DR 477 COMPA pale aa beeen e fhe ded ad PR s 431 General Information isa asec RARE EES EN 427 Iii ioo A EER st ee RUAN es 429 Inflation Pressures ss sues ELE ARE eR ed ts 428 JKD aaea agape E IR AD HI 477 481 Load Capacity 1 229 94 VER ER TER IR ERE 423 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 438 Pressure Warmte LIS BE ss aded yet n ve 272 Qualy Gragine as ERROR ARE AR BREED ted 567 Kactal 224045662065 DE en DE P TESTE S PE 430 Replicement P HIED ig eas Res 4 434 KOON Sap cene oe SA qas oe eee oe ee 437 vcl as OE DEE ON 418 DIZES Sas ER OR oe Oe ee EDE 419 pare If ieee ody eka nye aah Gee oe ees 479 OPIN sestetes snus ages senate DES ni 433 Tread Wear Indicators 15 esae 6542 40 46 ees 433 AO Open T1000 ee eere ee EEA 147 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 461 oi dte Converter C IURIS ss ec beeen oes Se aee s 975 Tow Hoo
18. Continued 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug POWER INVERTER IF EGUIPPED There is a 115 Volt 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the front of the center console to convert DC current to AC current This outlet can power cellular phones electron ics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Play station3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as will most power tools NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter The power inverter switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls To turn on the power outlet press the switch once The in dicator light will illuminate Press the 0350058840 Switch a second time to turn the po
19. Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch B gt o 054810748 ESC OFF Switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC has been disabled and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC OFF switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of operation NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC back on by momentarily pressing the ESC OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion 412 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable In an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESC mode is intended for off road use only 4L Range AWD Models ESC Off This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4L range Whenever the ve
20. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 3 Turn the center L shaped locks two from the center 4 Turn the rear L shaped lock located above the shoul of the roof panel der belt anchorage 035707351 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the windshield 035707353 6 Remove the left hand panel To remove the right panel follow the steps above except for Step 3 Freedom Top Storage Bag Your vehicle comes with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to store your Freedom Top panels The storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are facing downward Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and fold it back NOTE Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the latches facing downward N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 035707990 035707991 Unfold the black panel divider ensure the divider is Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the laying flat Secure the Velcro located at the center of the latches facing upward divider 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed Unfold the outer flap and zip the
21. VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Jeep Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler Group LLC Copyright 2010 Chrysler Group LLC A dy m O
22. e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESC cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESC system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one operating mode in 4L range Two wheel drive vehicles and four wheel drive vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 4H Range 4WD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 4H and 2WD vehicles
23. erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision i c 030933390 Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the adjust Adjustment Button ment button located on the base of the head restraint Rear Head Restraints and push downward on the head restraint The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable head re straints Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for information on child seat tether routing NEE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models NOTE e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to reposition the front seats e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback forward 030933901 Rear Seat Release 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward Removing The Rear Seat Two Door Models WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision
24. in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips 518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on
25. 004 136 DERE Em SR tae SORS d EL eke EEUE NE 383 Off Pavement SS SS SS SS ee ees 384 OOH Rad 23x29 aS EWER GAAN EED EE 384 DUA TOO 24443 eris PX Ra PP ROER KEER ER 168 Electric Remote Mirrors zu de Wa ee redo ers 96 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 160 Elecmical Power OHPIGIS sss acesa te beer DEE 160 Electronic Brake Control System 403 Brake Assist SYSIEM sad eeu doe darse Pitas 404 Electronic Roll Mitigation 408 Traction Control System aus srt d DES DI 404 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 408 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 157 Electronic Stability Control ESC 409 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 280 Electronic Vehicle Information Center inge m 280 286 Emergency Blake ca aede ud dos qd e d kites 399 Emergency In Case of Jacking Jump Starting Tow Hooks Emission Control System Maintenance 574 INDEX NEE id Engine PU Eleanef 4 este Me bud RD GE HE ES 502 Pock Hell uus ap os RE RUN ER prt 365 Break In Recommendations 83 ONDER HEI res a EERS RE SO DNA Vd 495 Compartment Identification 495 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 84 448 Pols tO oll ie aka AR e ee nere Oie he d E 363 Flooded Stan oerpake RE ASA HR d 363 Fuel Requirements ase EDE o HR RR 444 539 J rp SLOPE ses 6 Bes EVE Se Bee DOU eae 483 j Pm 500 539 Ol Change Interval RE AD OT E
26. 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER This system conveniently allows the driver to select a EVIC IF EQUIPPED variety of useful information by pressing the switches The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the tures a driver interactive display that is located in the following instrument cluster e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Tire Pressure Monitor System if equipped Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features e Compass display e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e Uconnect gps system screens if equipped 040933866 SP q EP Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC e Audio mode disp lay UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 The system allows the driver to select information by MENU Button pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering Press and release the MENU button to scroll wheel through the main menus Fuel Economy Warn ings Timer Units System Personal Settings or to exit sub menus COMPASS Button Press and release the COMPASS button to D display one
27. 81 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely bracket on both the left and right sides unzip the window 036007477 036033903 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle top 036007402 NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being installed To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 14 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift the top 036007403 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 15 Fold back the front section of the top pulling the 16 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as fabric rearward Gently rest the header on top of the
28. Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder reservoir In the event of leakage or wear use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid refer to Flu ids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id Manual Transmission If Equipped Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequen
29. C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergencies for further information 364 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 1
30. NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure AR NING Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a shoulder belt lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a be taken to your authorized dealer for service Failure fold that begins immediately above the latch plate to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal n 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing injury The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat positions the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the position that serves you best IN Adjusting Upper S
31. The system operates with a separate e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause type and tires must be properly inflated to produce the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury accurate signals for the computer CAUTION WARNING If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse 40 km h 402 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during WARNING Continued the self test and during an ABS stop to provid
32. This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing coasting or driving the vehicle for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information OVERDRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving The transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth gear Overdrive and will automatically shift from DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e The shift lever is in DRIVE e The O D OFF switch has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain strong head winds or trailer towing turning off over drive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup AV Ww E O D OFF Switch Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF switch located on the center console A indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the switch has been activated When the indicat
33. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ignition for unauthorized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks are disabled The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals when N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 activated The horn will sound the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm are quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while t
34. and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 570 INDEX NEE id ABS Anti Lock Brake System 269 401 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 512 ordures 449 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 502 Air Conditioner Maintenance 504 Par COUGINONING 2 uec p ad er RS RARR RD lt 344 Air Conditioning Controls sive ve wate tes dan 344 Aur Conditioning Filer sis eode er ER RR 355 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 356 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 505 Air Conditioning byster ses soe 285 dbus Sa 344 348 fu PIC s tae ae eee baa ee Se 502 Air Pressure Tires 00000000 eee 428 hier 4 poe ca the Ghee hoe ET EE EDE 56 Airbas Deployment aesa im e roe e mde WER 65 Abas LI 2x93 423942 925 99992 593 64 68 85 270 Airbag Mamtenante 5 244 407 ARE ER ES P 67 DS OIE ood oy eae ook RE DE SR VR ERE GC 64 ALONE serere TEn ae AAR ALS RED Ed 270 Alarm ee END faeces WEAR AE RR RE REOR A 18 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 9 Antenna Satellite Radio 313 338 Antifreeze Engine Coolant i 539 Anti
35. and Genu coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they information may not be compatible with the antifreeze engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol base engine cool ant antifreeze is not recommended 512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 104 000 miles 169 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant and distilled water Use higher concentrations not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water
36. and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MEE Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook Call by Saying a Name Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios NOTE Adding names to
37. diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the ee Electronic Stability Control ESC is off OFF Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively 416 STARTING
38. e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Messages e You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the vr button while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 List of Preset Messages 11 See You in 15 minutes 1 Yes 12 I am on my way 2 No 13 I ll be late 3 Where are you 14 Are you there yet 4 need more direction 15 Where are we meeting 5 LOL 16 Can this wait 6 Why 17 Bye for now 7 I love you 18 When can we meet 8 Call me 19 Send number to call 9 Call me later 20 Start without me 10 Thanks 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON OFF Bluetooth Communication Link Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the the system from announcing the new incoming mes Uconnect Phone When this happens the connection sages can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in e Press the Ne button Bluetooth ON mode e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice t
39. e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
40. enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC and ERM sys TT tems is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu Pura Anis Hor Medi VEREIS AND ver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to Vehicles modified with larger tires and or suspension assist in maintaining stability This disabled mode is lifts may experience early ESC activations as compared to a non modified production vehicle depending on lift size tire size suspension changes and or driving habits If early ESC activations are experienced while driving a modified vehicle the additional ability to permanently turn off ESC is available A steering wheel ESC button maneuver must be performed to permanently disable an emergency evasive maneuver the ESC and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only intended for off highway or off road use only Ve hicle modifications requiring the owner to configure the vehicle in the ESC disabled mode will seriously affect the vehicle s roadworthiness and safety and may lead to loss of control and or collision resulting in possible serious or fatal injuries 414 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The following procedure will disable or re enable ESC functionality in the vehicle 1 Shift the transfer case into the 4H range position 2 Turn the steering wheel until it is centered and the wheels are pointed straight ahead 3 Cycle the ignition k
41. lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a
42. 21 Remote Keyless Entry RKE coe ud arem o wis 2 ba 21 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 342 Remote starine System soa tdonacsoend d deam s 26 Replacement DUDS 2 20 24 irure elc p Rr RR 535 Replacement KEYS wae seke ERK UE EDS VET IR oe 16 Replacement Parts cessen giao eee RR 498 Replacement Mies sus cep d ven ees qe ii inii 434 Reporting Satety Defects x xad peter Ram RE EN 564 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 289 Restraint Head 2d wx EX boe EE RENS 141 Restraints Child eee 69 73 Restraints Occupant usa eene RE has San Red d 41 Rotation Tires es da quo ae ee oe BESS OES 437 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle x is 54 ER RR LE RYE 85 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 87 Safety Defects Reporting 5 dee oes cae ee oe 564 Safety Exhaust Gas Lacu s454shes ede bean Re d 84 bale Informauion WWE 2x24 ox 48 066 RARR ER 418 Dalely IDs rrr m 83 Satellite Radio Antenna 313 338 Schedule Maintenance ese 544 Seat Belt Reminder oa area d vs Ee EER cvs es 53 Seat Belts 24 24484004 Ro war o gi eee ER od 43 85 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 50 Amd Pregnant Women iss KELDER as oD Child Restraint 0 0 0004 69 80 Extelidel 229222 EE ORE Ee sus ees epee 55 FOO el rrr 43 InSDecHOH 246425 GEE E ERROR HER IRR AN ES 85 Mmea 1d x0 63 PESCE DE ORE PR S 026 Piel OGE PPP nm 53 Reminder eae eoe ree E AD a4 267 N INDEX 583 Untwis
43. AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Command System No function If Equipped ed For the radio Refer to Voice Command in the SIES EE N Made Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further A details m Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Press the TIME button to change the display from Manual located on the DVD for further details elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES TM If Equipped RW FF Auxiliary Mode Refer to Video Entertainment System VES TM in the No function Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further SET Button Auxiliar
44. Care for Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor mation It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result curtain up unless the side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the vehicle The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet NOTE Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into
45. Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Continued Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 437 CAUTION Continued e Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacture NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those on On Off Ro
46. Freedom bag closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag 035707993 035707992 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Install the seat attachment strap at the top of the bag Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and through the loops straps facing the back of the rear seat Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages located at the base of the rear seat 035707994 035707995 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and Front Panel s Installation loop the strap through the buckle Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat NOTE Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install the right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Front Panel s Installation with Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn the left and right panels over and move the spacer block located on the rear of the panel upward 90 035707996 degrees UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 3 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the tw
47. Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EEEE M i WARNING retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode When your child restraint is not in use secure it in e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt Older Children and Child Restraints several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into Child h oh than 20 Ibs edah the buckle with the release button facing out ee ee do QM older than one year can ride forward facing in the e f the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect seats used in the forward facing direction are for children the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older around and insert the latch plate into the buckle than one year These child seats are also held in the again If you still cannot make the child restraint vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child secure try a different seating position restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child
48. In structions for this vehicle WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully 484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the right rear of the engine compartment behind the Power Distribution e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when Center ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 4 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission P p 5 into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK Positive Battery Post 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485 3 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park CAUTIO
49. In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the VR button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the Sve button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone bein
50. J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 48 000 miles 78 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 40 000 miles 65 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 549 56 000 Miles 91 000 km or 42 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 56 000 miles 91 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Aut
51. L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 120 000 miles 195 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s Replace the accessory drive belt s Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 128 000 Miles 208 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 136 000 Miles 221 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance LH Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before J Change the engine oil and engine oil 128 000 miles 208 000 km filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes irregular wear even if it occurs before Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi 136 000 miles 221 000 km fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damag
52. Lock Brake System ABS 401 Anti Lock Warning Light vaso ass m wes 269 Appearance C TE oi BARAK LR dress Peg Ee Mi 522 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 19 Pssistamcs TOWING seve ti EL ERGE RD EDE ds 112 Auto Down Power Windows 39 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 289 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 348 Automatic Transmission 517 Fiuid and Filter Changes 2424544 aoe ag BR DE 517 Fluid Level Check usi ade de PP aoe DE 517 PII IVD wea een oh IS ORE erei O17 Gear age iis 24566 PEERS CEES ee Gee E 971 DWN PPP TET 370 Special Ads ss AR Sodio de KER ac 519 N INDEX 571 Torque Converter io nh ooo tego ee ees bah 979 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 160 Auxiliary Power Outlet sa dde ende EE RR EE 160 POG LOK MP c ee HE AE 360 zu acute hed KEES EDE REED DAE AS HORE 203 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 25 Belts Seat 442262592 eR RE MARRE CS 43 85 Body Mechanism Lubrication xev DER ER ves 505 Brake 55190 SYSTEM eu sie RE te oO Sod a ae 404 Brake Control System Electronic s usse 28 ma 403 DIOS Stel se ae ke bas eee CAES eee es 015 Anu bock ABS susse semada os Se MR EER N 401 Master Cylinder 12 cis is HEER LE eg 515 Fore RARR EE RE eee eee ee HE 999 Vane LIERE eu 39 9 2 1949 BEE PARE ERO 268 Brake Transmission Interlock 370 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 83 Bulb Repla
53. Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 EM and 12 Satellite if eguipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code f
54. Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337 Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s
55. Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you
56. Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment A INTRODUCTION 9 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS N Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS HA Word About Your Keys 14 Hlenition Key Removal 54 242 aa BR 55 A844 14 O Key In Ignition Reminder 15 MM Sentry RE EE RT OE neat 4 15 El Replacement Keys 5 04 auem REESE ES 16 O Customer Key Programming 7 Er General Information 22s amar does 18 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 18 o Rearming The System ignea 92 999a dx 19 H To Arm Ihe System uus exor qo SR doen 19 O To Disarm The Systemi 645 ech eee A RS 19 N illuminated Entry If Equipped 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped 21 D To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate 22 B To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 29 Using The Pantie Alarm sis sea n ee mde a 23 o To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock
57. O Phone Call Features 107 HD Uconnect Phone Features H Advanced Phone Connectivity H Things You Should Know About Your Uconnec M THONG sesa 44 tn uae eda derat E General Information 2 os os eue o deen es ll Voice Command If Equipped H Voice Command System Operation EPOR 2x 2804 3 deed WES RR RE REG oe O Voice Training RE OR EE KREET EE 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM EE RE N OO VET EG 133 oO Replacing The Rear Seat EL Pront seat d USED DE e e sos chee perangi 134 T DOn ET TT a io eek Fi Ali FourDoor Models ee cee ecco us It POUIPDCG da 44 45 4524 cee ACE E d BANE 135 O Front Seatback Recline ue aae med Ro s 136 EE LE TT xd 4 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat NLIS osx TE Pale DOR Ser inicios 148 Two Door Models io d edid yag ea mem d 197 A M lttuncton Lever o3 ud eearee ver pess 148 O Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models 138 o Headlights And Parking Lights 148 o Heated Seats If Equipped 140 O Turi SIGN als 4 os SES eyes ee ee DE 149 lle id Restrauiis sad asie ean ED dye resi 141 O Lane Change Assist s 2 vico des dau devon es 150 o Fold And Tumble Rear Seat E Dights On Remindet ss is mon mi mte as 150 le boot Mod ls soseer ae RE DEM 143 High Low Beam Switch oie ee ranma 150 E da oe O Flash lo Pass 5445554455 ou ET OT N 150 Two Door Models SS SS 144 HE tent les kielie as 9a
58. The driver side upper windshield trim contains the microphone for the Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so eguipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or an other prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound comman
59. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 031407548 Headlight Switch NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain weather conditions Turning the headlights on will usually accel 31407 erate the clearing process 031407551 Turn Signal Operation 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your he
60. The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 2 Release header latches from the windshield frame 3 Release the Sunrider latch both sides 81925914 PT cia T cus 81c65d28 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Open the swing gate and lower the top Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top Refer to Raising the Soft Top in this section for further information NOTE Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 2 Engage header latches 035907427 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME 3 Install rear corner panels 4 Install side and back windows UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 Lowering The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 6 Quarter Window 2 2 Bow 7 Check Strap 3 3 Bow 8 Front Retainer Quarter Window 4 Sail Panel 9 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 5 Body Side Retainer 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 81b32bb4 1 w Zipper Start Zipper Finish Swing Gate Bar Swing Gate Brackets Sail Panels JIA OO ND NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
61. The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 462 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Op erating for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the correct fluid type CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle or other parts could be damaged Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued NS TA TING AND OPERA
62. VEHICLE 153 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper opera tion Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper opera tion 031507503 Front Wiper Control CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the lever to the first detent position for one of five intermittent settings The delay cycle can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Windshield Washers
63. WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil change Replace as required 508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain e The catalytic converter requires the use of un carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system
64. above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 104 000 Miles 169 000 km or 112 000 Miles 182 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 112 000 miles 182 000 km 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 1 Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for not done at 60 months damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 195 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter
65. and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 500 miles 800 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided Trailer tow is not recom mended during break in period The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN WARNING Continued Exhaust Gas e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area WARNING in
66. bar assembly and reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 9 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255 WARNING You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the side bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps 10 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and remove the retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center console or securely behind the rear seat NOTE It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed 11 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield 12 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts th rubber hood bumpers 256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM DE Ee TR sear ER re we ee S EER TE EER EER MESS IR 13 Secure the windshield by passing a
67. been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is an accident Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and stow the seat belt extender when not needed _ Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The
68. cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high 344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped CLIMATE CONTROLS The Air Conditioning and Heating System is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather Manual Heating and Air Conditioning 045607535 The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345 Blower Control 045607539 Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ven tilatio
69. cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted that could affect the airbag system The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the airbag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the airbags inflate to their full size The airbags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Airbag gas is vent
70. com for instruc tional videos CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed If the temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 AUTION ti d CAUTION Continued WARNING e Refer to Appearance Care for
71. combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel If Equipped The spare tire of your vehicle is equivalent in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has an option for a spare tire matching original equipment tire and wheel refer to the recommended tire rotation pattern in Tire Rotation Recommendations in Starting and Operating for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip ment tire and wheel as a spare a non matching tempo rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your vehicle Temporary use spares are engineered to be used only with your vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with one of the following types of non matching tempo rary use spares compact full size or limited use Do not install more than one non matching temporary use spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Compac
72. connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF 326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO SALES CODE RES RSC NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 Media Center 130 RES RSC Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327 to seek up and the left swi
73. directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song
74. disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supp
75. door lock lever To lock a door when leaving your vehicle press the rocker lever forward to the LOCK position and close the door To UNLOCK the door press the rocker lever rearward Manual Door Lock NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate glove compartment and console storage 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 021833668 Power Door Locks If Equipped Power Door Lock Switch The door lock switch is located on each front door panel WARNING Press the switch forward to lock the doors and rearward to unlock the doors e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING a Continued The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving enabled or disabled as follows un
76. driver s Advanced Front Advanced Front Airbag And Knee Bolster Locations Airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The Advanced 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Airbags Front Passenger Airbag is mounted in the instrument 2 Knee Bolster panel above the glove compartment The letters SRS are NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal embossed on the airbag covers regulations for Advanced Airbags 022633796 N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be eguipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Airbags NOTE e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment e After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following airbag system components e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Lig
77. equivalent into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam age the windows FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartridge fuses mini fuses and relays A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse ME J OE J2 30 Amp Transfer Case Module Pink B qu dk 530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 25 Amp Driver Door Node 60 Amp Natural Yellow 25 Amp Passenger Door Node Natural 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Front Blower Green ABS Pump Stability Control System mE Starter Solenoid Ignition Off Draw IOD Main Rear Defroster Powertrain Control Module PCM Trans J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Pink ABS Valve Stability qud oystem CNN NEN ENDE Range J9 40 Amp PZEV Sec Motor Flex J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Green Fuel Yellow J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Relay J20 30 Amp Front Wiper LO HI Pink Manifold Tuning Valve Pink J11 30 Amp Sway Bar J21 20 Amp Front Rear Washer Pink Blue MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Descrip
78. exhaust system Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer m a Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 32 000 miles 52 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 548 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 40 000 Miles 65 000 km or 48 000 Miles 78 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 30 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter
79. from the factory Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make OutsideThe Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bree SARTRE OE EE N EE es 94 B Inside Day Night Mirror 94 vi ii el tige MARS EE Soe oS FOR EE 95 O Power Mirrors If Equipped 96 D Heated Mirrors If Equipped 96 Ayam MITO 3 53 ea ede Ae eee eu e hes 96 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 97 Hero so kor ge owe che eens N ROLE 99
80. greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars 384 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped NOTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove the two nuts from the bodyside v 9 V0 5 ER gt uu NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 385 2 Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle OE IOOODDORIOIIODDIORDOOIGDOGOODGOIGDDIGOD DD DEK ODE OE Ge GE a ERK RE DOG fri Tree ends Ee ee E 3 Remov
81. indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion aft
82. information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name Vehicle Identification Number VIN Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 877 426 5337 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 563 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s
83. little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the airbag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN positions If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbag system is not on and the airbags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that P may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light for four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup o Y It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment
84. located in the Compass Temperature display this message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO Operating Instructions Radio Mode RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER l MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right E tetadio E Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second Se E Ee o a ot the radio om OT Electronic Volume Control da The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 042005200 Media Center 230 REQ 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
85. make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side T
86. maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR 452 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be egual to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weig
87. of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 565 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http
88. of eight compass readings and the outside temperature or to exit sub menus SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT button for access to main menus sub menus or to select a 040634197 personal setting in the setup menu EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MEE DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the sub menus V Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime RKE Battery Low with a single chime Memory 111 32 Profile Set Memory 1 2 Profile Recall Memory System Disabled Vehicle Not in Park with a single chime automatic transmission Memory System Disabled Vehicle in Motion with a single chime manual transmission Memory System Disabled Seat Belt Buckled with a single chime Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in Park automatic transmission Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle in Motion manual transmission Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PA
89. oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 16 000 miles 26 000 km J Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 8 000 miles 13 000 km Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 16 000 miles 26 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 547 32 000 Miles 52 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 24 000 Miles 39 000 km or 18 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 24 000 miles 39 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect
90. or equivalent N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525 if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor Alle Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 526 MAINTAINING YO
91. powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Position This range is used for normal street and highway driving on hard surfaced roads 378 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 4H Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Start ing and Operating for further information 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer cas
92. quos a A HE AGS 150 Personal eties ascia sor esee ea HERDER RR RS 294 Pls Sv 82 Phone Cellular 2464223426 n ERR RE 97 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 97 Placard Tire and Loading Information 423 Fol huis and VEE o ereire 5 609 KORE DER 523 Power Door oek PPP 34 Eis OER EE SOLE EE 164 MITO M L 96 vc T 397 398 ue 5446 tiert es ewe BERE ROER N 38 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 55 Preparation for Jacking 2255 ede RARR BREER ees 479 Pretensioners Seat Belts re ge ROER ERA esa hoe a ee 53 Programmable Electronic Features 294 Radial DT Tes oi dea ard 2 9999 apex HORE os 430 Radio Operation sons aor 28 sine ehh boone esas 344 Rear Axle Differential less 521 Rear owing Gate sk gd Red ee cane tipi ote qus 40 Rear Window Defroster lll 259 Rear Window Features 000005 258 Rear Wiper VIS Def voe ie sea P terrats CIRS 258 Rearview Mirrors 22423499344 SEER RT TES 94 Recorder Event Data llle 68 Recreational Towing 142 aee EE AR Roe 4 83 eR d 469 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 471 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 473 Reformulated Gasoline iss 444 kele sx x3 iche tide HERE ER Release Hood 582 INDEX NEE id keminde Hills On 1a easi RED RES ER DR 150 Reminder Seat Belt SS SS SS 99 Remote Control Door LOCKS usu acp we RR URP URS POSU EE Bed
93. rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor may damage paint 5 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when removing them To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and Hinge Pin Screw lower outside hinges using a 150 Torxe head driver 3 Slide the front seat s fully forward 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 Remove the trim access door from the bottom of NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push B pillar the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected mm s LI LE B Trim Access Door 5 Unplug the wiring harness connector Red Connector Latch 6 Unhook the door strap from the body hook NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 7 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door NOTE Doors are heavy use caution when removing them To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks All doors are equipped with an interior rocker type
94. recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then move the temperature control to the desired temperature 045607534 Automatic Temperature Control NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349 Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the sys tem will maintain that level automati 045607537 Cally using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime w
95. reclined so that the handle to return the seatback to an upright position shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat Two Door Models Pull upward on the recline lever toward the rear of the vehicle and slide the entire seat forward Easy Entry Seat To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seatback upright until it locks and push the seat rearward until the 030934794 track locks 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE e The front passenger seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position e The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position Tip n Slide Seats Two Door Models This feature allows the front seats to be rotated toward the instrument panel to allow easier entry into the rear Seats Driver s Seat Pull upward on the recline lever and bring the seatback to its full forward position Recline Lever Rotate the entire seat assembly toward the instrument panel UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Pull upward on the recline lever and slide the entire seat forward Easy Entry Tip n
96. restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed airbag must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seatbelts This feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both front seatbelts are fastened BeltAlert triggers within 60 seconds of vehicle speed over 5 mph 8 km h The reminder sequence lasts 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id for 96 seconds or until the respective seatbelts are fas tened After the seguence completes the Seat Belt Re minder Light remains illuminated until front belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seatbelts If a front seatbelt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will chime as a single notification and illumi nate the Seat Belt Reminder Light then will proceed to the 96 second reminder sequence The front passenger seat Bel
97. slotted hole in the tray 3 Open the rear compartment cover Rear Storage Cover 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the hard top are to be used independently Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time Removing the Soft Top 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the following items e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window e Two rear window roll up straps e Two Sunrider secure straps if equipped e Two rear swing gate brackets 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws two per side using a 130 Torx head driver NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 NOTE To aid in disconnecting the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet
98. specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for ap proximately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake applicat
99. sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 393 WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recove
100. symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasoline that meets the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components NS TA TING AND OPERATING 445 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearl
101. tether anchorage directly be hind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Posi tions section The chart below defines the seating po
102. the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile
103. the driver s seat e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness compromised with the convertible top down to a large degree rely on the phone and network and TM Far End Audio Performance not the Uconnect Phone EE RE ds e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced EE l by lowering the in vehicle audio volume low to medi e low to medium blower setting e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be e low to medium vehicle speed compromised with the convertible top down 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls SMS Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message e Press the Sw button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages e Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message e Press the tt button
104. the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa Hon e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle
105. the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal pol ishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recom mended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover
106. the vehicle s interior 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mmmm Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft Top 2 Release header latches from the windshield frame EE EEE a ace 1 Remove the side and back windows 81925984 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 3 Fold header rearward pulling the fabric to the rear 036007403 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 4 Release Sunrider latch both sides 5 Open the swing gate and lower the top NOTE Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation E 81927762 TT ES ET 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 Install rear corner panels 3 Rotate the header forward 0361 07424 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 4 Engage the header latches 5 Install the side and back windows 81925914 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 4 Bow 5 Sail Panel od 036007423 6 Body Side Retainer 7 Quarter Window 8 Check Strap 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window NN UNDERSTANDING TH
107. the window not up and down MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic win dows without scratching It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents 3 Always rinse thoroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529 zipper teeth If a stuck zipper slide is experienced work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or
108. title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not Number of files and folders Loading times will supported by the radios increase with more files and folders Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended supported to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in seguence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary
109. until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the r
110. vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down stream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning 396 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id After Driving Off Road e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage does most on road driving After going off road it is to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and always a good idea to check for damage That way you propeller shafts can get any problems t
111. volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska 338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and You may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Siriu
112. warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned OFF The system will auto matically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 35 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Ligh
113. water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas Or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 395 CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers Or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never at tempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your
114. will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is 05301 0747 Sway Bar Sway Bar Switch _ indicated by a flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Press Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar return to off road mode Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar NS TA TING AND OPERATING 383 To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off road position Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode press the SWAY BAR switch again WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode vehicle stability is
115. will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call whil
116. window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 430N RHR RER RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia RHR RER RBZ or RHB user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User
117. 054903773 4 Maximum Load 5 Maximum Pressure 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 419 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design st
118. 130 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service 54 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before filter 80 000 miles 130 000 km I Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the irregular wear even if it occurs before engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 72 000 miles 117 000 km Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 104 000 miles 169 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Inspect the front and rear axle fluid damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 552 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 88 000 Miles 143 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate the tires rotate at the fi
119. 16 96 80 64 56 48 y 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 Layer 3 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325 To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The awdliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is
120. 2 COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If its sunny set the Mode control at or between and sd then turn the air de TY conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near J and turn 646 c the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near sd If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between d and d In very cold weather ET if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS W Starting Procedures ses ss 362 GO Manual Transmission If Equipped 362 H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 362 E NODUDLODIBINE siese RD PEOR EED BOR HS 362 O Extreme Cold Weather below 20 DOE eactewater de qae 363 oO If Engine Fails To Start sioe se mm 363 MANE DIOE vas 13r VER RA RR BE bend 365 N Engine Block Heater If Equipped 365 lll Manual Transmission If Equipped ENG uu sor de oe Bes KAN EE READ GO Downshifting A Revere SUING sis EER o oo eee sees W Automatic Transmission If Equipped H Key Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transmission Interlock System O Automatic Transmission With Overdrive 358 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id ll Four Wheel Drive Operatio
121. 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 N m 522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near sea coast
122. 4 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247 4 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the 5 Locate the straps to secure the side bows Wrap the material is folded back as shown straps around the bows as shown Repeat on the other side NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider use If activated the soft top must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels 036107475 Er 6 Reposition the sun visors 036107474 248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEE Closing the Sunrider SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS 1 Remove the straps from the side bows IF EQUIPPED 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side CAUTION 3 Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the Operating the top opening a door or lowering a vehicle window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior 4 Hook the header latches to the loops on the wind shield frame close latches and return the sun visors to their original positions NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom 5 Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle link NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249 Opening the Sunrider 3 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift l
123. 4 Assist Handle 10 Power Mirror Switch If Equipped 5 Glove Compartment 11 Horn 6 Power Window Switches UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 040307643 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Eguipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank 4 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 8 gal 10 6L this light will turn on and a single chime will sound 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes 5 Speedometer on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non Indicates vehicle speed essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the FRONT ated charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See Q EVER an authorized dealer 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 7 Seat Belt Remi
124. 49 267 536 538 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 97 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 067 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 49 Upiory Care La 34 eta dE 3 qe 4 d E 024 Waly bede Tm 96 Variance COMPASS Lux e veu RU HERE 284 293 Vehicle Certification Label 22929999 RR S 451 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 N INDEX 587 Velde Loading sai 5244544400 SERE KO 423 451 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 9 Nelle DIOE erat toh ee Er DA HAD R Di 354 534 Viscosity ENGNG OU essre ax dob Ghee 9e 501 Voice Recognition System VR 128 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 266 Warnines and Caos sousie Eed vers torsk 8 Warranty Information s 229 906 46046944 a 24 564 Washers Windshield less 506 Waxing and Polishing saxea set RERE Geog es 523 Wheel and Wheel TM ses cheese oa os ee AE a 524 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 524 Wheel MOES wisaeso tac pris uS be 482 Wind DUMCUNS siese spe iod 624 Heke eRe SHR mS 40 WINOOW DOES us dta urge a dedos Durs Spp vb es 355 WOW APP pm 38 MOWGE sies caw de d has ag ea eg A en aar ed 38 Windshield Defroster 86 346 352 Vndstele Oli cosa up 108 aes 9 Pars qoc d bb 251 Windshield Washers 153 506 RARR EER EE ee ee oe EERS 506 Windshield Wiper Blades as oe eon e ES 506 Windshield Wipers ook wes EO 9 E e e p PEE e 153 Wiper Neal sopie RA P 258
125. 4v x ERR RS 68 O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 51 Lt ld MESO oe OES qv acest oR RD eet pe pt 69 D Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR lBl Engine Break In Recommendations 83 I PEDRO eed ae AE NEE rats EM d s HpS se reis BAUER Go EE d ER piii 83 O Seat Belt Pretensioners iis eme Ese SR 53 cTransporting Passengers isses 83 H Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Ti 53 BE dt de ED m 84 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 55 a a MEE MISC HE p nd res kore EV de be DR RE Go WE 85 Heat belt Extender s ucc Re deeb ER E hy a 05 7 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make O Supplemental Restraint System SRS O tsidethe Vehicle 3 22 icis tte co Ted eden 87 ke EE OER sw aeg Paro ee dd 56 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 62 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal 1 Place the shift lever in PARK if equipped with an automatic transmission 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY position Ignition Switch Positions 3 ON RUN 4 START IOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 Push the ignition key inward 4 Turn the i
126. 5 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 365 CAUTION The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adeguate warming effect on the engine To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater ETSANG cord before driving Dama
127. 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE automatic transmission equipped vehicle and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate HSA On Automatic Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL HSA On Manual Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE forward gears and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short period while in NEUTRAL regardless of clutch position To prevent this do not attempt to roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling Instead use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Towing With HSA WARNING Continued HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trai
128. AND OPERATING swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is functioning the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped HDC is only intended for low speed off road driving HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills in off road driving conditions by applying the brakes when necessary The symbol indicates the status of the Hill 2 Descent Control HDC feature The lamp will be on solid when HDC is armed HDC can only be armed when the transfer case is in the 4WD LOW position and the vehicle speed is less then 30 mph 48 km h If these conditions are not met while attempt ing to use the HDC feature the HDC indicator light will flash on off When enabled HDC senses the terrain and activates when the vehicle is descendi
129. ANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Interior Lights The overhead light will turn on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi mately 10 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward or if equipped when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The sports bar reading lights available on four door models can be turned on by pressing the switches located on either side of the lens Press a switch a second time to turn the light off 031407603 Sports Bar Reading Light The rear cargo light may be turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light off 031434793 Rear Cargo Light When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control to the extreme bottom posi tion will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
130. ARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Engine GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Transmission Gross Combined Trailer Wt Tongue Wt Wt Rating See Note 3 8L i Four Door 8 139 Ibs 3 692 kg 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic Sahara 3 8L Manual Four Door 8 209 lbs 3 724 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Rubicon 3 8L Four Door 8 233 lbs 3 734 kg 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg Automatic Rubicon Model Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo ie the GVWR and the GVWR should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Infor mation placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 461 Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight e
131. ASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn t
132. ATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH The rear seating positions have lower anchor X ages capable of accommodating LATCH com patible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments and child seats with fixed lower attachments The rear seat lower an chors can be readily identified by the symbol located on the seatback directly above the anchorages and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 surfaces Regardless of the specific type of lower attach ment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchor ages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a
133. Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel WARNING If the clutch pedal manual transmission only re mains pressed during the application of the throttle the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll down the incline This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object To avoid this do not apply throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are ready to release the clutch Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped 406 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id e Vehicle must be on an 8 or greater incline 3 for manual transmission eguipped vehicles e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than
134. Contract Service uus s o i 4454 56 8 EO HSE aS S 563 Cool EDE Wee te GREEP eee eset ae PS 510 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 512 Coolant Capacily 644430555555 HER RR RE 599 Coolant Level 4 4 46 466656444644 Hie oH oo 513 Disposal of Used Coolant i222 3 519 Drain Flush and Refill 511 IDSpDecHDI use enr d 30 3 EEU ae be SES d unb AE 510 Points to Remember sn 514 Presse Cap eave eeuua cane NEK OAR DELI 513 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 511 539 Corrosion Protection gawiavauvvdeaa Goda bees 522 Sk EE cde P Start EE FEE 271 Sdn PC T 166 Customer Assistance SS EE 561 Data Recorder Event iss ieswezcoR4 is eb ee 68 Daytime Running Liglils aed koe o ee es 151 Dealer Service X243 92239 43 ve ae EE SA 499 Defroster Rear Window 259 Defroster Windshield 86 346 352 Delay Intermittent Wipers 4200 nn 154 N INDEX 573 Diagnostic System Onboard ies rx ER 496 Dimmer Switch eadhent periret erregis 150 Dipsticks JENDE Sos cuu an AR dor Sp x Res dose a 500 Power Ee cqa 44 65 4 Puta ER ed qe d purs 398 Disabled Vehicle Towing lisse 490 Disarm ng Theft DUBII Saks OER e prios ues 19 Disposal EnSIne OU Lev owe dsrP SEE TEST aco 502 Used Coolant Antifreeze 513 Door LOKS 5 oq o4e ew oe OF HEES HER ete RE 33 D AA N a EE ER ee eee ead 28 Driver s Seat Back Tilt
135. D player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Butt
136. Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con trol device and may seriously reduce engine per formance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalyt
137. E 289 Oil Disposal Lu varie uou uo DEL EER CR SA 502 eB EO EE GEE OE SE 502 Susi TD 539 Ovorli s dD Hoe PES P das ates HA EDE 476 ELS casos beast ERROR OR eae eae 362 Temperature Gauge sessie RES eee ee ae 271 Eise OIl VEE diea xac 65 oe eh HARD HOE 501 Engine OIL Viscosity Cham eese sos cess 501 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 65 Entry System Illuminated ours 20 EINADO 2222 5 52 5 85 309 29532 4 HER A IRR 445 Event Data Recorder 68 Exhaust Gas Caution lesen 84 448 Exhaust Svslenl s ides p tah Rr eR de 84 507 Extender Seat Belt 2 2 vu dedecus wk EYES 55 Exterior Finish Care SS ss 523 EXIGHOE bielie etn eu cameo camera Re 87 Fabric Care sos ene den oad Re o s oe ows 524 526 Elbie Hs 4 444 444 toe toe oo eg WEE Y 526 Filters Ait Cleaner 4 6446425444664 550 40 4454 Ee 502 ie CONGIVONING axe XR Oe sans PP 355 Eie OU 424 528 EE ES OR do E HEES 902 Fish Care 24244 5445 005 AU ee eee oes 523 N INDEX 575 Flashers Hazard Ware sie oos SR R RIDE HD Se A76 TEN SITE oe eon qus HE PUE 87 267 036 538 Flooded Engine Starting usua d pe enna eee 363 Ehud Capacilles s siya s viro d es oh ae Ag es 539 ETuic EN EE EE OS ER EG 87 Fluid Level Checks 064 522 Automatic Transmission 517 Ense OU se vaeou dee ies iese VEE AD e 500 Manual Transmission 520 boere ED 2 45 way uut coe no nae ye E 398 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts
138. E FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 81b32bb4 1 w Zipper Start Zipper Finish Swing Gate Bar Swing Gate Brackets Sail Panels JIA OO ND 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer T 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the i A 819259f4 vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 4 O th i te 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side pente Ee 3 Release the header latches and hooks from the loops on the windshield frame NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls swing gate brackets will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 81b34aa7 5a32
139. E STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer ible with some after market remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other ve
140. ER AIR RECIRCULATION ROWIC ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTIOCH WASHES FLAO LEVEL OUTLET Li WINDOW DOW DOWM STABLITE CONTROL DRIVE BRAIOMG SYSTEM vA n ade OE CX X aa VU m me WENOSHEELD UFTGATE RELEASE GRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE DIL REAR WINDOW E um REAR FOG LAM AMDLETGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST OFEN LOWER AR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BAKE i TOW E31 gp W v Gm e 4 di o6 A VOCE SUONG DOOR Mag AR CONDITIONING TILO SEAT RECOGNITION VARING TOW FAAN TETHER ANCHOR BATTERY HEATED ROW RN a CHAROIMNG BUTTON eel LEMA u LOWER Eor GLOW AUG POWER oer POE ARRAG BLIDING DOON M npe LIGHTER AWD TETHER FOR UCONNECT HAAXARD FOR WWEEL STEERING FLUIO AND cmonen TATEM BUTTON onn LOW sns X ah AIC 5 C mama U m p CI P5 2 PUSH OFF MALFUNCTION ENTIE COOLANT SUPPLEMENT SSENCER ODOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE SEE OWNER S AIR ELECTIVONI IWmC ATOS Loot ou Teme TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM EAR OFF TOF DOWN TOE MAWAL OD CONDITIONER STABILITY CONTROL OFF 010533317 8 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification
141. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode 332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The displ
142. FUEL CAUTION Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling Fuel Filler Cap 450 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one click This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled Loose Fuel Filler Cap
143. Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor e Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window mation It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result Continued curtain up unless the side curtains are also re moved Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee red ees rage ae Refer to Lowering the Soft Top in this section for Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior further information water damage stains or mildew on the top material e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet 1 Remove the side and back windows may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior
144. Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 13 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate 14 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear at the lower left corner of the rear window opening window The spongy part of the seal should be down and Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned pone outward to seal with the swing Bue Ven closed before zipping to prevent damage 036033904 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 16 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 15 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 17 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate 19 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to bracket on both the left and right sides their secured position d 036033903 18 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top Please visit the owner s section of Jeep com for instruc fabric The vinyl will str
145. ICLE ME WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether e If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the an accident lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out Vehicles With Rear Web Buckles That May Need To Be Twisted Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission
146. In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold e If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit NS TA TING AND OPERATING 443 upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound General Information and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitor following conditions ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure e This device must accept any interference received Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for including interference that m
147. Manual located on the DVD for further details MEDIA CENTER 130 SALES CODE RES NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate SING NPI Ca TE 3l TIME LE DISC 042305232 Media Center 130 RES UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button
148. Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 451 VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies
149. Model 2 32 sq m AWD 3 8L Manual 3 Two Door 5 243 lbs 2 378 kg 1 000 lbs 453 kg 100 lbs 45 kg Sahara Model 4WD 458 STARTING AND OPERATING Engine Axle Model GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Transmission Gross Combined Trailer Wt Tongue Wt Wt Rating See Note 3 8L Manual 3 Two Door 6 243 Ibs 2 832 kg 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 200 lbs 91 kg Sahara 3 8L 6 267 lbs 2 843 kg 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic 3 8L Manual 2 Door Ru 6 320 lbs 2 867 kg 25 sq ft 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 lbs 91 kg bicon Model 2 32 sq m 4WD Sol Two Door 6 345 lbs 2 878 kg 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Automatic Rubicon Model AWD Engine Axle Model Transmission 3 8L Manual Four Door X Model 4WD 3 8L Manual 3 73 Four Door X Model 4WD Automatic X Model 4WD 3 8L Manual Four Door Sahara 3 8L Manual 3 Four Door Sahara Model AWD STARTING AND OPERATING 459 GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Gross Combined Trailer Wt Tongue Wt Wt Rating See Note 5 465 Ibs 2 479 kg 32 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 lbs 45 Kg 2 97 sq m 7 965 lbs 3 613 kg 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 2 97 sq m 7 989 lbs 3 624 kg 32 sq ft 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 2 97 sq m 5 615 Ibs 2 547 kg 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 lbs 45 Kg 8 115 Ibs 3 681 kg 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg 350 Ibs 159 kg 460 ST
150. N the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery On
151. NEL 289 e Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h e Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion e Liftgate Ajar with a single chime e Check Gascap refer to Adding Fuel in Starting And Operating for more details e Service Park Assist System with a single chime e Oil Change Required with a single chime e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator if equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle
152. NING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure
153. New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 1 800 485 2001 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 564 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State
154. OICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command VR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command GEVR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be
155. OTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on e paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Towing Assistance coverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24 Hour Tow ing Assistance references e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance
156. Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the VR button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the VR button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entrie
157. RE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and pull upward 1 Grasp the half door window and line up pins into pockets in lower door 2 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated E 7 f Front Door Removal ua 1 Roll down the glass window to prevent any damage gt E p P ri As 2 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver Upper Half Door Window 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the rear cargo tray located under the rear loadfloor the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected Hinge Pin Screw 3 Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instru ment panel by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect 1 Harness Connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 4 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful NOTE The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror the
158. RSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E 7 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them 8 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior panels over the rear roof bow side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 9 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body 10 To install the side windows affix the window tem side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 11 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 12 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle
159. RTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components 5 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 021432709 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system ha
160. Seat Anchorage System vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back NOTE For additional information refer to w
161. Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH eae Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6 5 3 8L Accel E 24 39 55 90 Cruise 10 eu a cml d on d 0 Downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid 368 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds CAUTION Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed Manual Transm
162. Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is Continued firmly on the brake pedal 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position Once the key is removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position and the brake pedal is not pressed To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed Automatic Transmission With Overdrive Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever
163. Slide 030934794 Passenger Seat Ed In addition to Easy Entry the front passenger seat is also Easy Entry Lever equipped with Tip n Slide This feature allows for easier entry for rear passengers 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M With the seat forward pull the entire seat assembly toward HI instrument panel WV AN B beum i CS Tip n Slide Heated Seats If Equipped On some models the front driver and passenger seats may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each seat are located on a switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument panel You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF ay When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the system will automatically switch to LOW level after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation At Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to sh
164. Slide the latch plate up the tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your Webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around passengers safe too your lap Continued another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 NE GL 022633802 EB Pulling Out the Lap Shoulder Belt Latch Plate Inserting Plate Into Buckle 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will WARNING Continued e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is loose will not protect you properly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in an accident increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the force in a collis
165. T Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into 031333906 position the seat will not provide the proper stability Hood Latch for child seats and or passengers An improperly Raise the hood and locate the safety latch located in the latched seat could cause serious injury middle of the hood opening Push the latch to the left side of the vehicle to open the hood You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031407547 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever Multifunction Lever Headlights and Parking Lights Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to the second detent for headlight operation The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals
166. T Bowes dawade es EDE DOE HARDE GO 270 Anti Lock 2244 444 aco eek dh E HHS 269 Anti Lock Warning id Pie Ee Ro Ray Rs 269 DICKE aa suadere dua P EI PES SERS ER 538 Brake Assist Warning lt s Ee sa ER DE ss RE as A14 Brake Waming 24 Ee EE dg 4 ER RE dod de EN 268 Bulle keil tei 442 i2405aceneepane om sa DOD amp oA rm 152 Center Mounted SOP ius iex i due act d 538 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 277 Gus MT 271 JOVE Kon 2339s E RE oe ER RT MORS 151 Dimmer Switch Headlight 150 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 414 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 280 Engine Temperature Warning 2x vc aed aora 270 PICHON MO 87 RE wu d obese seen BET ae i 150 537 Hazard Warning Flasher 476 els tel dale WEM essare N DE AR ies 148 els tel ii srar RE AE E 539 Dion DO s ER EE oo GR one ESE d 267 High Deam Indicatoi se v stants eae Cae E ERAS 267 Hill Descent Control Indicator 416 instrument Cluster 42 4 o e es oe xd ek 148 IMCNOL guceeendheaye eee ee eae eee wee es 152 Lights On RemMder st dade Y 234 543 150 Low Piel 2434 se ke RERR EER D PEER Pe ER 266 OU TISSUES 292g EES ERROR ea ee sees 267 POOSI ue DERE RC Eobdolidor ORR RE A 150 N INDEX 579 Roar SORIA 9929952 RS IESU IE d os 538 Rear Mm 538 Seat belt Reminder lt 4 2 44 449446584 8 04 267 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 270 elle snow x SUE EPA ERN A NUS ees 535 Side Wanker iss
167. TING 463 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to the brakes axle engine transmission steer ing suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmis sion shift the transmission into first gear And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the transfer case is not in N Neutral Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR Continued 464 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Con
168. TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 WARNING Standards The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you e Rearward facing child seats must never be used in will use it before you buy it the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for sai weight and height limits infants in this position Improper installation can lead to failure of an e Carefully follow the instructions that come with the infant or child restraint It could come loose in a restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may collision The child could be badly injured or not work when you need it killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the
169. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to ee assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft v top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow the half door windows carefully outside of A A 819259f4 the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 4 O th i te 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side a WIS EE 3 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the loops on the windshield 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls swing gate brackets will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover 81b34aa7 5a32 81 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 6 Remove the rear window retainer from the swing gate 9 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely bracket on both t
170. TURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Door Frame Removal WARNING 1 Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment Use both hands to remove the door frames The door knobs two per door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used is F 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the ae a A front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle storage Store in a secure location UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the body side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews rubber seal at the top of the windshield 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body cde bebind ihe do open ie 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both Door Frame Installation Four Door Mod
171. Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows You to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
172. To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will start and continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off 031507503 Front Wiper Control WARNING NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h could lead to a collision You might not see other delay times will be doubled vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate 031507504 Mist Control NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward T
173. To use this feature press the amp button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept a single phonebook entry from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the na
174. UNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN I
175. UR VEHICLE M 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak e After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering e Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Windows N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527 ET WASHING Use MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent or CAUTION Continued mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use MOPAR Con t is recommended that the top be free of water vertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
176. UR VEHICLE NN Id To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the RKE transmitter LOCK button Re lease both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve hicle Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STA
177. UTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down WARNING an impending overheat condition You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure heat the mode control to floor and the blower control cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING from the engine cooling system WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit whe
178. aan 2o 2 bor EO RR ts 150 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 O Instrument Panel Dimmer hey B Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 151 ELIGIGHOE GIGS uascacucr von e Reed ated N REK 152 ll Windshield Wipers And Washers 153 o Windshield Wiper Operation 154 O Intermittent Wiper System is ss se EE o 154 o Windshield Washers 155 A Mist ENDIE s suu ee Ee Feu cau DO 156 IN Tilt Steering Column o cesso ute ox es 156 N Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 157 El TO en c mm 158 O To Set a Desired Speed ve see evince rop v 159 O To Decat rr m 159 OTO Resume Speed 1454445 EE EXER 159 o To Vary The Speed Setting s seas uw so a0 EE 159 o To Accelerate For Passing 160 B Electrical Power Outlet ll Power Inverter If Equipped W Cupholders oo s doped E BUL OND HR RS 166 O Front Cupholder sci a scie ed dici AD 28 166 El ke rCupholders s o uarie edes rd RR 166 Ee RA EE OE 166 O Console Storage Compartment 166 O Rear Storage Compartment 167 WE Dual Top If Equipped sessie DEE RE EN 168 ORemoving Ihe Soil TOP ss ssn06 e06 ter 168 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E O Installing The Soft Top ll Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top If Equipped D Front Panel s Removal H Freedom Top Storage Bag D Front Panel s Installation O Front Panel s Installa
179. accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no least one minute after every five rocking motion transmission shifting occurring cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle 488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or vehicle chains may break causing serious injury even failure of the axle and tires A tire could or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injuty explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are s
180. ad type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed 438 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 11 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 439 The TPMS will
181. adio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Radio EM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel T itch to the F FM or Radio FM I eee m ee dy ordine Pag List Channel to hear a list of available channels e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu s 44 I1 h h 3 e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi ae Mc ne el tO eee OE To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track
182. adlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released Front Fog Lights O The front fog light switch is located on the multi function lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft 1 m They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on 152 UNDERST
183. age wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer l8 558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEE t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer N to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident OO omMCOMITOO mo2zrames IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your prd eT hues Ge ERROR eee DIG sees 561 O Prepare For The Appointment 561 df te dies Hi 46444 fevered apne ade DI 561 o Be Reasonable With Requests 561 N If You Need Assistance 561 H Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
184. ain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have a collision Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp auxiliary power outlets that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The front power outlet is powered from the ignition switch Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 A second power outlet is located inside the center console and is powered directly from the vehicle battery NOTE e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Im proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not Front Power Outlet covered by your warranty When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used in the power outlet it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heat ing element do not hold the lighter in the heating position 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE On veh
185. aken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it e After extended operation in mud sand water or similar dirty conditions have the radiator fan brake e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle rotors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected Check tires body structure steering suspension and and cleaned as soon as possible exhaust system for damage e Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as WARNING required Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on ESE wear or Hopie taDle vr is on ent the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten them if reguired and torgue to the values specified in the Service Manual not have full braking power when you need it to prevent a collision If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 e If you experience unusual vibration after driving in NOTE mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel impacted material Impacted material can cause a travel are considered normal and do not indicate that wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will there is a problem with the power steering system t the situation SDLESCE BL Di HOT e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power
186. also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 429 Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If
187. and Operating for further information Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 469 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four Wheel Drive Models See Instructions e Automatic transmission in PARK Flat Tow e Manual transmission in gear NOT in NEUTRAL N e Transfer case in NEUTRAL N e Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED inis NOT ALLOWED 470 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neu tral automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK and manual transmission must be placed in gear NOT in NEUTRAL for recreational towing CAUTION e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Tow only in the fo
188. and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel Always make sure that floor mats are properly the air directed against the windshield See your autho attached
189. and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L Low range Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simultane ous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud And Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great
190. andards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 420 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id EXAMPLE 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may
191. anuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 567 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would
192. are Tite 5lOWBPE aane ao ah d ERR ES 479 Wi Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped O Preparations For Jacking 479 W Shift Lever Override 0 0 0 489 O Jacking Instructions deseo m Roe dn 809 4 d 480 W Towing A Disabled Vehicle 490 o Towing Without The Ignition Key FOB 491 D Four Wheel Drive Models 492 476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN id HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped shift transmission into NE
193. ation including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www Siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items
194. attended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a l EE 2 number of reasons A child or others could be 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in 9 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON the ignition A child could operate power win RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the dows other controls or move the vehicle LOCK position Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 3 Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with doors power door locks if 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is Programming sn La 5 Repeat these steps if you want to retum this feature to 2 The vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h and the its previous setting transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 3 The driver door is opened feature in accordance with local laws 4 The doors were not previously unlocked 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors we
195. ave your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 562 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following
196. axi mum distance of 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 020205844 Three Button RKE Transmitter 1 Lock 2 Unlock NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate Press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver s door only or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed the Illuminated Entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first RKE transmitter UNLOCK button press using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter NOTE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK butto
197. ay Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 orrels To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s WARNING to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror 030433897 Outside Rearview Mirror 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls A rotary knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position Power Mirror Switch After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off positi
198. ay cause undesired 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair operation or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is l below the low pressure warning limit in any of the United States sses eies ho Hs md MRXC4N3MF9 four active road tires The vehicle may need to be Eina es ts wae we eee es 2546A C4N3MF9 driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information e This device may not cause harmful interference The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses 444 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id FUEL REGUIREMENTS All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso s00dfab line having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these
199. ay will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333 EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time
200. be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing its the tire size two di ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 422 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been dri
201. bs 811a4d11 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left 428 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation
202. but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door lock plung ers or the driver s door lock cylinder will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to unlock the doors this feature is only available if you have RKE or if you open a door This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds if the doors are closed They will fade to off immediately when the doors are closed and the ignition switch is moved out of the OFF LOCK position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and liftgate lights do not turn off in 30 seconds if the dimmer control is in the interior lights ON position extreme top posi tion e The Illuminated Entry System will not operate if the dimmer control is in the extreme downward position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and activate the Panic Alarm from a m
203. can Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id Synthetic Engine Oils Synthetic engine oils can be used if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to your engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be im paired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately dis
204. carded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 WARNING WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Fail
205. ce Avoid ice or slippery de oie Ok EE ee r l wheel 6 areas EE WARNING NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the when the vehicle is being jacked Vy i Preparations For Jacking i DELL n wl i ums ee LIT 4 r bi Was s dl i vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNEEEEEEE dacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehi
206. ce and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light STARTING AND OPERATING 441 A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or mor
207. ce the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it trol or Electronic Stability Control ESC turn the system can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE Using minimal
208. cement serpere ER ees 535 Pubs Lie 2532992 5556 ene ee ee eee eta es 87 Calibration EOMPASS uude iS RARR RS 265 22 Capacities Fd 2040666 RE sd dr PER eR 539 Caps Filler Piel PP 449 Tower SICCUNG ESRA KAS abner ane ES WS 398 Cat Washes e646 gon EO SOs EE Oe Oe 529 Carbon Monoxide Warning deos skepe Des de 84 448 6 Ed APP EE EE carne 152 Cargo Vehicle Loading sisse p ba nose DEAR 451 Cellular Phone ers SEER REED oe 3 97 344 Center High Mounted Stop Light 538 Certlicatiom Label sii ganse i gem d sess 451 Chains Tire eee 436 Changing A Flat Tre ees EDELE PTS 477 Chot ite SUAE usce deb SV krear 419 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 572 INDEX NEE Id Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 83 CHECKS Saleb si oa SBA ABR LE DR HE OSA eee 83 Child Restraint is dad messe 4 ean ES RS 69 70 76 80 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 74 76 lati ale LOCKS sa ees fers be MA SER PER Syd Cd il 44 oe are REDES mM BREAD ARMES Oe 75 Cimate ORLDEOL is a 6 aoe es DEE REK AE POE 344 E EE pa bere oe ewe eee eas 298 318 327 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 343 Compact pare DS wies e a ied qon vara ves 431 COM Pace ua e Pine o nee P pP EN P Bus 280 285 291 Compass Calibration esas sis b pes E s 289 292 Compass VatianEe 2 2 ps xy awe scars 284 293 Computer Trip Travel su id 2 Be RES 280 290 Colo MCCC OR HE 166 Console FIOO soes be KERSE da idi krina 166
209. chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 lbs 4 540 Kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle STARTING AND OPERATING 457 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Axle Model GCWR Frontal Area Max GTW Gross Max Trailer Transmission Gross Combined Trailer Wt Tongue Wt Wt Rating See Note 3 8L Manual 3 21 Two Door X 5 075 Ibs 2 302 kg 25 sq ft 1 000 Ibs 453 kg 100 lbs 45 kg Model 2 32 sq m AWD 3 8L Manual 3 73 Two Door X 6 075 lbs 2 756 kg 25 sq ft 2 000 lbs 907 kg 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 2 32 sq m AWD Vi 21 Automatic
210. cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and x on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place Raising the Windshield and Replacing Side Bars di 1 Raise the windshield l 2 Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars earlier in this section i IRE On e Reattach the sport bar Velcro covering NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257 3 Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black frame round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head e Install the top two hex bolts 13 mm first then the o oe or e wa n lower side hex bolt 13 mm The lower side bolt will not align until the top two bolts are installed us x T 6 Reinstall the wiper arms 819292b7 258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY NJ Rotate the switch upward to the first detent posi tion for rear wiper operation Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped A rotary switch on the center portion of the control lever Rotate the switch upward past the first detent to located on the right side of the steering column controls activate the rear washer The washer pump and the the operation of the rear wiper washer function wiper will continue to operate as lo
211. cities 44444444 eoe BRAK Re 599 H Totally Integrated Power Module 529 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 540 W Vehicle Storage SS es ss 534 EENS ING 24662424400 SRSA AE LARR E 540 W Replacement Bulbs EES Se 535 E Chase 22249 OE EE OE 541 N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L n Ra 1 n Aa Coe 10 071110765 1 Integrated Power Module Fuses 7 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Battery 8 Engine Oil Fill 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Washer Fluid Reservoir 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Id ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need to
212. cle on a jack Continued Jack Warning Label N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from the stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Connect the jack handle driver to the extension then to the lug wrench 4 Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged 060505249 6 1 Rear Jacking Location 2 Front Jacking Location Jacking Locations 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause a collision It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the w
213. cle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law enforce ment could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id There are different sizes and types of restraints for childre
214. complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury Driving Downhill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel 392 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id WARNING confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and proceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured Driving Across An Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover Make
215. curity Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation
216. cy Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle If the fluid becomes contaminated with water it should be changed immediately Otherwise change the fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Transfer Case Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521 CAUTION When replacing the plugs do not overtighten them You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Rear Axle Fluid For normal service periodic fluid level checks are not Adding Fluid required When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be begins to run out of the hole inspected If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Drain Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa First remove the fill plug B then the drain plug C The tion recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 to
217. d Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Foreign Language Language Information Inform NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset but
218. d can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id example you can use the compound form voice command Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice com mands Phonebook and New Entry Please re member the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pa
219. d the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Pa nome GE NOE 4 M 0 ip Y n i LI ed P 4 i n e rd a IE gt TW AA A I a E Jj D O Trip Display Button Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler Uconnect gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the Zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing NOTE e A good cal
220. deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use second gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the press
221. display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode 334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems
222. e Brake Warning e Never use the PARK position on an automatic Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime transmission as a substitute for the parking brake will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking Always apply the parking brake fully when brake before attempting to move the vehicle parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front number of reasons A child or others could be wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away seriously or fatally injured from the curb en uphill grade For vehicles equipped Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake operate power windows other controls or move before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load the vehicle on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 WARNING Continued braking conditions
223. e wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 5046 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557 144 000 Miles 234 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service 152 000 Miles 247 000 km or Schedule 114 Months Maintenance _J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before I Change the engine oil and engine oil 144 000 miles 234 000 km filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the 7 Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary irregular wear even if it occurs before Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary 152 000 miles 247 000 km Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for dam
224. e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion near the floor While sitting in the seat lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once you have reached the desired position Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Manual Seat Adjustment N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seatbelts and while the vehicle is parked Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seatbelt Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using Seat Height Adjustment the ratcheting handle located on the outboard side of the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat push downward on the handle to lower the seat 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Seatback Recline WARNING Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the desired position and release the handle Lift the Do not ride with the seatback
225. e blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are oper ating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event e All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Adva
226. e bottom inside of the rear at the lower left corner of the rear window opening window The spongy part of the seal should be down and Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned pone outward to seal with the swing Bue Ven closed before zipping to prevent damage 036033904 244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 17 Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of 19 Insert the rear window retainer into the swing gate the window bracket on both the left and right sides 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets 036033903 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245 20 Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS ing the rest of the retainer into the body channel IF EQUIPPED 21 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to CAUTION their secured position Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle 246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mmm Opening the Sunrider 3 Slide the plastic sleeve forward 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 8192591
227. e climbing the log modulate your brake and independently You need to use caution when crossing accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great 390 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attemp
228. e is shifted into the 4L position NOTE When in 4WD the ESC Off Indicator Light will display in the instrument cluster Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after complet ing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 379 4H to AL or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neutral Once the shift is completed place the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch pedal on a manual transmis sion NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h WARNING Failure to engage a positi
229. e of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h to receive this information 442 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash NOTE on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS
230. e other connecting point of the vehicle This kind of hitch is the most popular on the market today and is commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars It is typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in a collision Weight Distributing Hitch Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi tional information 456 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Trailer Hitch Classification The following
231. e placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction e
232. e placed over or near the airbag If your vehicle is equipped with SAB do not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating SAB could drive the objects into occupants causing serious injury on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Continued Continued WARNING Continued e Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during in flation e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB If Eguipped Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags provide en hanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air bag is marked with an airbag label sewn into the out board side of the front seats THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 1 EE Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag Location When the airbag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each airbag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the left airbag only and a right side impact deploys only the right airbag 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Being too close to the Su
233. e swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera 18 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the Hon bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any portion of the top from flappi e of the vehicle 19 Close the front header latches 20 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM Raising the Soft Top 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame windshield frame in this section for further information ores 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link Sunrider Models only 035907428 j UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 5 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows 6 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each latches to the door rails Sunrider Models only side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches EES S 035907427 210 UNDE
234. e the regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a The ABS cannot prevent collisions including low humming noise during operation this is normal those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro WARNING planing e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 403 NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti L
235. e the side step assembly The Basics Of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and ice Every surface has a different effect on your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire 386 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When To Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills
236. e wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC in this section for further information Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 405 WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Hill Start
237. e you are currently on a call press the tVR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the e button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep
238. eadings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Eguipped The ECO message will display below the outside tem perature in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press the MENU button until the Personal Setti
239. eatures Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h manual transmission or when the shift lever is in PARK auto transmission Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the DOWN button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol or Francais Then as you continue the informa tion will display in the selected language Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When on is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1
240. ed MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M24 25 Amp Rear Wiper M33 10 Amp Powertrain es Natural Red 20 Amp Fuel Pump Diesel Lift M34 10 Amp Vans Assist Climate Pump p Onl Red Control System Head Es lamp Wash Compass Amp Ignition oe Feed lid 10 Amp ee Mirrors Red Wireless Module Red EA os Module Yellow M29 pf M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys M30 ae Amp Wiper Motor Frt J1962 Red ks Stability Blue Diagnostic Feed DES OE OO AI Switch Fuel Pump Yellow 25 A Lock Unlock Mot Red EUROPE 534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than e When installing the Integrated Power Module 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop battery You may erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected e Re
241. ed through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB Inflator Units If Equipped The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags Inflator Units if equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is trig gered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts front and side impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to certain impact events Enhanced Accident Response Sy
242. el Filler Cap Message 496 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance L EDOTOBIS s X oe Poser dca acce aote dos DERE ear d 497 W Replacement Parts codec pues RET vd 498 W Dealer Service si EE ss eee 499 Bl Maintenance Procedures 499 BEREID i5ayaceu se ees abu es T9 500 O Engine QU Biter san 2 xo ecu doe OR eeu s 502 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter sv res RE DI 502 O Maintenance Free Battery s ius dar Rs 903 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 504 O Body Lubrication L2 9e S3 RE SERERE o Windshield Wiper Blades O Adding Washer Fluid 24 zudem 506 H Exhaust Systemi 20626424 h42 46 RAPER eda 507 Cooling System 24 ch vedas qup RE RETE ES 510 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake ste x aco de PERD IH PER Sn dra 515 W Bulb Replacement ie Ry 595 H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 517 sisi Ar E 535 O Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual O Front Park Turn Signal ou os lt lt e4 lt eo4 4 536 A E o yd axe ata eaneg es ud O Front Side Marker sgh ex eR RE RETE 537 o Manual Transmission If Equipped 520 oFront Fog Lamp sees 537 EIranciel Case 4444454556554 4055 8 eno os 520 7 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup O Front Rear Axle Fluid cuv S RIA 6 os RE 521 un PEE TEE ESE EO OF 538 D Appearance Care And Protection From H Center High Mounted Stop Lamp COMOSION a ee ehh ee eas EX x3 ENS 522 CEDVISE 2444 sh4e e550 EORR E EGO ER oF 538 di ME EE a Gee HEN ca es 529 W Fluid Capa
243. elected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331 hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window
244. els on N peat Oit oer IOS 1 Install the rear door frame first AO 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side just behind the rear door opening 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Position the top of the door frame against the metal 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to rubber seal at the top of the windshield pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 6 Clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame 4 Loosely install the rear knob long knob to hold the door rail in position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 7 Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top 9 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and of the front of the rear door frame Ensure the seals are then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other installed correctly to avoid water leaks side m 7 d 8 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B pillar 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS Please visit the owners section of Jeep
245. equivalent or a mild prior to opening it Operating the top opening a foaming cleaner on the entire top but support the top door or lowering a window while the top is wet Eom aderseath may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Use care when washing the vehicle water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water RINSING Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material to leak into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior e Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pres sure may force past the weather strips Continued 528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id Care of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across
246. er which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico N
247. erformance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi cated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel in Federal and California ee STARTING AND OPERATING 447 Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Fed eral law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emission control tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer system 5 An out of tune engine or certain fuel or igniti
248. ers 355 oignal TUN sis aas EES PER RE 87 149 267 536 538 Snow Chains Tire Chains 436 DOM te RA AE EE oop eh eee ee BE 192217 584 INDEX NEE Id bare TE 21 2210 99 REELE EE BOY RS 431 432 479 Specifications Fuel Gasoline sis 3 042034 445408484 45 04 444 Oil sen eee eee NR EE ONE ENE 501 Speed Control Cruise Control 157 DOCedOMIRICE Ep 266 Dist si dios he p qe AARD ee DRAAIE AE 362 Automatic Transmission 362 Cold Weather 22234 Vue xwv Reti sda 363 Engine Block Heater 3 ao sa eicere ses 365 ENC Wie Fals 30 IE acoso OER KORE t inci 363 Manual Transmission 2 4 lt e52e2s ee8e6 362 Remote d AE OR AA N N OE vs dase ea 2 FI 26 Steering Power SS SS SS SS se 397 398 TO Ol ay 4 be Go eee SEAT AE ee eee 156 Wheel TE uus Gos eo oa oe ee ee eo ees 156 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 342 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System CONOIS 1 roepe SP ee ED bos mens WE DE 342 se AARON Sega ET ETE 166 534 Storage Behind the Seat si ese Ma RR cee de a 167 PiOlace VENICE uus 4 up REA EU hon ae eas 354 534 Storing Your Vehicle s 2a eek poe 534 SEE reer EE oe 487 Sunrider sess OR AE OO AO tii etau 245 248 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 56 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 381 ie Gale Real rou ius ws DEER od 1 HE RR oe 40 Dy stem Remote HEB ses ee pean BURE RR HOS 26 ibn 058 270 Temperature Control Automatic ATC
249. ertain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Headlamp 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 CAUTION turn counterclockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil ring contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 6 Remove the lamp from the collar bulb with rubbing alcohol 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counterclockwise 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bulb 1 4 turn 8 Pull the bulb from the housing clockwise 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock position Front Park Turn Signal 10 Remove connector from bulb 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the LL BE Penne connector locking tab to the lock position 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove
250. es in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service ie vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355 Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be guickly re moved by tuming the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obst
251. es a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Trailer Tongue Weight TW The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 1076 or more than 1576 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control If Equipped The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer NS TA TING AND OPERATING 455 tongue It typically provides adjustable friction associ ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un wanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or som
252. es to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle 514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being
253. etch back to its original size and tional videos the top can then be snapped into place If the tempera ture is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains Co e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax buildup may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top Grit may scratch the window has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Continued 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued WARNING e Do not lower the top with the windows installed EE the valida wih the tear window Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance
254. ey OFF to ON 4 Wait approximately five seconds for the system bulb check 5 Turn and hold the steering wheel one half turn to the right clockwise 6 Press and hold the ESC OFF button for seven seconds 7 Turn the steering wheel back to center and turn and hold an additional one half turn to the left counterclock wise 8 Press and hold the ESC OFF button for seven seconds 9 Turn the steering wheel back to center 10 Press and hold the ESC OFF button for seven sec onds 11 Cycle the ignition key to OFF After performing the ESC disable procedure correctly ESC OFF will be displayed in the odometer for ap proximately 12 seconds each time the ignition is moved to ON Repeating the ESC disable procedure will re enable normal ESC operation ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on e when the ignition switch is turned to the ON running position It should go out with the engine If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a NS TA TING AND OPERATING 415 malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
255. f the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 18 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera WARNING ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily others could be badly burned by steam or boiling The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION 19 Cruise Indicator Driving with a hot engine cooling system could cRulsE This indicator shows when the electronic speed damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H control system is turned on pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with 20 AWD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether
256. f vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not INTRODUCTION 5 Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal injury Drive carefully EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIRBAGS ODEN OM WER ID CI MEER ELS INPUNE Y LI T MEME AVEC DES SACS COMFLABLES PERFECTIONNES TT ee mt 34 0b ot uw pl DAD TAN iain othe 1 A BNOUETIE AN ot GAY LA PLAE LA PUM KONT he Tel Ace fal De ASTE T LACE HOM OR NON POSE UIE Cotas ME MA oi PALE JA ad od POUR AR E CAE v ue LAERE A UB v Bo ve AE t 9 mE UB ETD be OST OLS OP ie DX Thee POUR OFAN ORE LE ADE 8 LAP OER BIG nemen OE AOCDCOMMENTE VOX iD UC GOMELAIE MOVER PUT h GARSON OXILO AT m NE FCRI Aen UR ISETVELS AMO OILE GED T I C On MES ABICO CON MORE eO MIC Pu ern asua A WARNING io em WOO Aat MAS CLES AO OL GET VELD i e 5 A MISEEN GARDE 725 WETTER LER IA NOCUNGLIE APP TUR CI LA TEE OON EA TOOU PORTER LEI CGNTUN OG EC CURITE CONMATER Li JALE
257. face and service interval is not required The fluid should only be with the engine off to prevent injury from moving checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho power steering fluid rized dealer If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely STARTING AND OPERATING 399 054110749 Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate 400 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id NOTE WARNING e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear th
258. following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 OZ 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 Layer 3 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 Layer 3 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios 336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD
259. forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 21 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome ters The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 22 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 23 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicl
260. from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537 Front Side Marker 3 Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch features and squeeze them together to unlock the bulb from the back 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front of the front fog lamp housing side marker socket 4 Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing and then connect the replacement bulb 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace CAUTION F Fog L al Fed SAMD Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil 1 Reach under the vehicle to access the back of the front contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the fog lamp bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 2 Disconnect the wire harness connector from the front pale wi SEPP Ie ook fog lamp connector receptacle 538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamp 1 Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER SCREWS AT ANY TIME 8193fcba 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counterclock wise then remove it from the housing 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Center High Mou
261. ful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door 6 Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider locking frame tracks and slide the top forward mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear doors 81926dc3 Par i cR 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 9 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches EES S 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the side bow until it rests on the windshield frame 036107424 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 10 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them 11 Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be prope
262. g the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Airbag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval e The Airbag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle s systems per formed The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as e How various systems in your vehicle were operating N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehi
263. g announced press the VR button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the VR button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the VR button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect TM Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the amp button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experienci
264. garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 430 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial tires in sets of four Never
265. ge Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environme
266. ge to the 110 115 Volt AC The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine k 5 electrical cord could cause electrocution warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED 5 The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking The engine block heater cord is found under the hood brake fully applied The parking brake should al bundled in front of the battery tray ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up This is normal 2 4 6 R Shift Pattern 81cd6226 Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 You should always use 1st gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer Recommended Vehicle
267. ght as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you refer to your original equipment or contact an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability NS TA TING AND OPERATING 435 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Never use a tire with a smaller load index or that specified for your vehicle Some combinations capacity other than what was originally equipped of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load pension dimensions and performance characteris index could result in tire overloading and failure tics resulting in changes to steering handling and You could lose control and have a collis
268. ght get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor WARNING They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are EK Le not permanent and normally heal quickly However if e Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners can you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if not protect you in another collision Have the you have any blistering see your doctor immediately airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retrac tor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer immediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well e Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued Maintaining Your Airbag System e Do not attempt to modify any part of your airbag WARNING system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may ar e Modifications to any part of the airbag system not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any airbag system service If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including remova
269. gnition key to the LOCK position and remove the key N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 WARNING Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFOR
270. gnize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 MPEG Sampling Fre mm Playback of MPS WMA Files Specification quency kHz p When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded 320 256 224 192 the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 160 128 112 96 contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more Layer 3 80 64 56 48 time to start playing the MP3 WMA files MPEG 2 Audio 1 1 160 128 144 112 Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be Layer 3 74 22 09 16 96 80 64 56 48 ayer popa affected by the following WMA Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than pecification quency kHz CD R media 48 64 96 128 160 44 and 48 192 VBR e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album
271. he door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located on the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 sec onds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm successfully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle Security Alarm is set To Disarm The System To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however You can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked
272. he engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened e The hazard switch is pressed 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id e The transmission is moved out of PARK e The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start reguest To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle DOORS CAUTION Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicles interior THINGS TO KNOW BEFO
273. he ignition switch to the ON RUN position Do not start the engine NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of I an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and dr
274. he left and right sides unzip the window 7 Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching 10 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side 81925b60 8 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 11 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body 12 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle that they rest on top of the soft top 81925d12 NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 13 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed 14 Completely release the latches from the loops on the unless the hard top is being installed To remove the windshield frame If your vehicle is not equipped with swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward the Sunrider package proceed to Step 15 while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle p to disengage ee A ques ee ee ie ae 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM 15 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over 16 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sun the Sunrider link Sunrider Models only rider Models only 81c65d28 17 Before lowering the top open th
275. he tilt lever is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Pull upwards on the lever to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the the same time If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control right side of the steering wheel System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in gt y the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system Poe Y off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise cance f eT A Indicator Light will turn off The
276. heel Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper loca tions 12 Remove blocks from wheels NN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483 WARNING NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or precautions hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve CAUTION hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any the places provided other booster source with a system voltage greater CAUTION than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor EF It t l ical 1 Do not attempt to raise vehicle by jacking on loca alternator or electrical system may occur tions other than those indicated in the Jacking
277. hen the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If you
278. hicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Se
279. hicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESC system will be in this mode In 4L range ESC and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 64 km h At 40 mph 64 km h the normal ESC stability function returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 56 km h the ESC system shuts off The ESC is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but the ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 64 km h The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESC is off NOTE The ESC OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur even if the message was previously cleared NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 413 WARNING ESC and defeat the functionality of the ESC switch Repeating the procedure will return the system to normal With the ESC switched off the enhanced vehicle ESC operation and restore ESC switch functionality al stability offered by ESC and ERM are unavailable In lowing ESC Partial or Off modes WARNING With ESC in the permanent disable mode
280. horized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 550 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES E 64 000 Miles 104 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 64 000 miles 104 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles eguipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or freguent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary d m d E Hd a Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 551 72 000 Miles 117 000 km or 80 000 Miles
281. houlder Belt WARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in an accident As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on accident This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in accidents Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automat
282. ht e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Driver Advanced Front Airbag e Passenger Advanced Front Airbag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver WARNING continue and front passenger airbags This system provides output Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers appropriate to the severity and type of collision as or attempt to open them manually You may dam determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC age the airbags and you could be injured because which may receive information from the front impact the airbags may no longer be functional The Sensors protective covers for the airbag cushions are de signed to open only when the airbags are inflating The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an If your vehicle is equipped with Supplemental impact that requires airbag deployment This low output Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB do not use is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is accessory seat covers or place objects between you used for more severe collisions and the SAB the performance could be adversely WARNING affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury e Noobjects should b
283. ht values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving NS TA TING AND OPERATING 453 Improper weight distributions can have an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this sec
284. ibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the center of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 Compass Variance Map N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 To Set The Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the RESET button on the steering wheel for approximately ten seconds until the current variance Zone number is dis played To change the Zone press and release the STEP button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic inaccurate or abnormal you may wish to calibrate the compass Prior to calibrat ing the compass make sure the proper zone is selected 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the RESET button for approximately 10 seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the RESET button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display
285. ic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Drive Center Passenger FirstRow N A N A AIR ALIR AIR AIR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
286. ic converter dam age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cooling System WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser if equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connec
287. icle Weight Rating 451 453 el av 451 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 97 Laid Top sis ee PER IPRC I PRI EE oes 178 Hard lop Modula x deser a6 eon esos ba oe ed 173 Hard lop Removal oo se 05 EO 0915 EER pinctii 181 Hazard Warning Flasher s eek bu GR RR HRS 476 Head Restraints 42 992923 EER RR Reg 141 als OK ME HE EE dus EO PRAES ESSE MS 141 Headlights Balb Space OE ros siseneda RU Eq OE ce 520 Dimmer Switch oa bee ESKOM wee DEERE B 150 ROD IGEIUE peat EE HA eae eee eee E ES Sa 935 SWICK uum oon os AA ade OR ORE EE 148 Heated Seats avus Dei eae dees bees bees 140 Heater ART AR OP AE OE OE AE Be IF 344 Heater Engine BIOCK ses cus eas em rid RE EE 365 High Beam Indicator 222 x9 pucri x HEAD RA 267 Hill Descent Control lesen 416 Hill Descent Control Indicator 416 Hill Start Assist llle 405 Hitches TIGE TOVINE 2454452350555 De APT 456 LOlder C dp 45245455595 oe oh OR C READ oes 166 Hood Release 4 24 648 Re Se E es 147 N INDEX 577 Hydraulic Cl tch Fluid sis sa KORO RE EERS 519 LION wes qu 99 Gare SEP AE ee ee RR RA ARE 14 AE rrr 14 Ignition Key Removal ad a x bare AR air 14 Dh nmundbed En ses sce soos eme ER KERE GOS 20 Immobilizer enu Key si ccwa tases arbres ara 15 Infant Restraint 4244444444444 4 e445 84664 70 Inflation Pressure Tires 0000000 428 Information Center Vehicle 286 Inside Rearview Mirror
288. icles eguipped with a rear subwoofer there is a third power outlet located in the right rear cargo area 072736476 Power Outlet Fuse Locations h T 1 M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear with Sub Woofer o Opt Rear Power Outlet If Equipped 2 M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 3 M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e mobile phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery
289. ideo system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears Illumination Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the SELECT button until Off 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Nav Turn By Turn When this feature is selected the navigation system utilizes voice commands guiding through the drive route mile by mile turn by turn until the final destina tion is reached To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until a check mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been activated or the check mark is removed showing the system has been deactivated Hill Start Assist HSA If Equipped When on is selected the HSA system is active Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for system function and operating informa tion To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Display Fuel Saver If Equipped The ECO message is
290. ight or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These button
291. ill maintain some rear seating room Jf 030933902 Release Bar Location 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE To Fold Down the Rear Seat e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to Locate the pull strap lower outboard side of seat and reposition the front seat to its mid track position pull it toward you until the seatback releases e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Pull Strap Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 To Raise the Rear Seat TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference Release both the hood latches from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt make sure your seatback is fully latched WARNING roe Pie
292. indow switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console To disable the window controls press the win dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls press the window lockout button upward qo 021933671 Window Lockout Switch 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Rear Power Windows Four Door Models The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console Press the switch down ward to open the window and upward to close the window Rear Power Window Switches Four Door Models Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening REAR SWING GATE The swing gate can be unlocked by using the key Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the swing gate press the button on the gate handle Gate Handle NOTE Close the rear flip up window before attempting to close the swing gate hard top models only THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip up window as damage to th
293. ion 12 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light O After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If the light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting And Operat JJ ing 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id CAUTION 13 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped REAR This light indicates when the rear axle lock has Q been activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion I
294. ion A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during an accident You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an accident THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 NOTE The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on WARNING until the driver and front passenger if eguipped with front passenger BeltAlert seat belt is buckled For e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of further information refer to Enhanced Seat Belt Use internal injury in an accident The belt forces Reminder System BeltAlert won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but l across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor E will withdraw any s
295. ion Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings Continued 436 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id M l CAUTION Continued Tire chains may be installed on all models except the Sahara and Rubicon Install chains on rear tires only Because of restricted chain clearance between tires Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and other suspension components it is important mnd Bea End chan wear that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use e Use SAE class S tire chains or traction devices only Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as CAUTION e Use chains on P225 75R16 tires only P255 75R17 P255 70R18 and LT255 75R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance possible and then retighten after driving about V mile 0 8 km
296. ir your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three
297. ission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear 6to5 5to4 4to3 3to2 2to1 Selection Maxi 30 48 15 24 mum Speed Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to a complete stop Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE 80 129 70 113 50 81 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 The knock over prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver SS that they are about to shift the transmission into RE Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL VERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can into any forward gear when the engine is above be perceived as a high shift effort idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED is firmly on the brake pedal CAUTION WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e
298. ithout affecting automatic operation e Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary 350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN e If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Blower Control For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the knob to AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off 045607536 position the blower will shut off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart tha
299. ivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 26 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on ee when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN e Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC sys
300. ks Emergency uos wea sre side onis 488 JOVE seis usa EE RUE d owe RR ELA 453 490 24 Hour Towing Assistance 112 Disabled Vehicle asses PEER RR been o d 490 up M Recreational sie 2446639545 CES RS PES Weel gag hese RR PIRE TY REPERI IAE Towing Assistance 586 INDEX NEE Id Trac Lok Rear Axle x soe edem ipe te REP Se oe 379 TaChon COMWO ss mes HE HR 9 E Ob Ei eredi d 404 Trailer Sway Control 15C s cer eden eee BA mesi 415 Trailer TOWING cigs tosh ner ORE PR DRS ae ees 453 Cooling System HIDE si veta oci xa die or d ics 468 FINCHES 244058 oe ose eee ee ROER AE d 444 456 Minimum Requirements 2h a a6 EER Ede sis 462 Trailer and Tongue Weight 461 WING EER AE RE EE EE OT Tes 466 Trader Towing Guide is es se Ee MEER ER gon 457 TESI Wein Loue P aredpa it aique ded a YE 457 Transiter Case P 520 Four Wheel Drive Operation s see RE ER 375 Munn euis heen HE boe 2e S dog d 520 Transmission WC MP 370 Maintenance usos do Gee Eie ke EE Oe RE 517 520 Wintel 242444542245 EE BEA EROSIE 365 RanseludiealOE sapere SEER BARS RR RR HE d 272 viui TC C 369 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry uade pues d 9d aree gs 25 Transportne Fels unsgeekcadou ok dO hae beens ees 82 Tread Wear Indicators ss bess NEAR wee ERA 433 Tip COUIDHIOE x ies ER bene EER RR EER 280 Hip deel a cus peire aaepe 2 oy PES WS 274 Trip Odometer Reset Button isse mmt aas 272 TUE CaS ce v sre vade 3 8 E YR S eg 1
301. l ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is run ning the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 31 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer for further information COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer features a driver interactive display displays informatio
302. l or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the airbag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper or vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Airbag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with airbag system electrical components While the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer ser vice the airbag system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on durin
303. lack in the belt 022633804 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position Lockout Four Door Models Only If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever allow the belt to retract fully the 60 rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt WARNING when the rear seatback is not fully latched A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident NOTE and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt e If the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose out check that the rear seatback is fully latched parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc e If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor
304. lders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file 324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling freguencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling Fre quency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 92 160 128 144 112 MPEG Audio 24 22 08
305. le Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 9 779 O OP O ad Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn ee STARTING AND OPERATING 467 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the O D OFF feature should be selected NOTE Using O D OFF while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing 468 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id O D Off To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over heating select the O D OFF feature when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Automatic Transmis sion in Starting
306. le begins from a stop in low gear with automatic tices can overheat and damage the transmission upshift to second gear The vehicle will not shift into When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be third gear tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the 1 First wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud sand snow or on steep grades The vehicle begins and stays in low gear with no upshift This gear provides engine compression braking at low speeds NS TA TING AND OPERATING 375 Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored for abnormal condi tions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the Transmission Limp Home Mode will be engaged In this mode the transmission will operate when in DRIVE in second gear only To reset the transmission use the following procedure 1 Stop the vehicle 2 Move the shift lever to the PARK position 3 Turn OFF the engine and be sure to turn the key fob to the LOCK position 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds then restart the en gine 5 Move the shift lever to the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation If the problem persists PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate Only second gear will operate in the DRIVE position Have the transmission checked at your authorized dea
307. le for normal usage 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop leaving it con nected to the tow vehicle 2 Firmly apply the parking brake 3 Reconnect the negative battery cable 4 Turn the ignition key fob to the LOCK OFF position if it has been moved or the engine has been started 5 Turn the ignition key fob to the ON RUN position but do not start the engine 6 Press and hold the brake pedal 7 Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL 8 Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neutral turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear clash 9 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in Neutral 10 Release the brake pedal 11 Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle 12 Start the engine 13 Press and hold the brake pedal 14 Release the parking brake 15 Shift the transmission into gear release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual transmissions and check that the vehicle operates normally WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flasher 476 W Jump Starting Procedures 483 H If Your Engine Overheats 476 O Preparations For Jump Start 484 W Jacking And Tire Changing 477 O jump taung Prodedite 2 5 rasei dx een es El Era dione OR 4645484054655 465 HE DIG BED 478 W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle O Sp
308. ler as soon as possible Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions e 2H Two wheel drive high range 376 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id e 4H Four wheel drive high range e N Neutral e 4L Four wheel drive low range NN W Four Wheel Drive Shift Controls The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard surfaced roads In the event that additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accom plished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components
309. ler e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough ra brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer ona NOTE The HSA system may also be turned on and off hill and this could cause a collision with another if the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration Information Center EVIC in Understanding Your In manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas strument Panel for further information ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued 408 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id HSA Off If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this procedure 1 Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK auto matic transmission or NEUTRAL with clutch out manual transmission with wheels straight Apply park ing brake
310. ler is not required NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 465 WARNING Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an collision e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in a collision should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances 466 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety The Trailer Tow Package will include a four pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustration 1 Fema
311. localities N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523 e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION e Bird droppings f PESO e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials Washing such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of completely with clear water paint and decals e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu Special Care lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR a month 7 Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to e Itis important that the drain holes in the lower edges scratch the paint of the doors rocker panels and tailgate are kept clear and open e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish 524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
312. lt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator anti freeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507 some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade perfor mance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers
313. me of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the VR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designa
314. mmodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments The two door model can accommodate flexible LATCH compatible child seats in the two outboard seating positions only The two door model does not have a center seating position Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only in both the two door and four door models Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment never install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt for typical instal lation instructions Installing The LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system e Ve I meets the seatback and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to ins
315. move Cartridge fuse J13 in the Power Distribution Center PDC labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD and store it in a safe location within the PDC e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535 REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Lights Bulb Type Auto Trans Indicator Lamp 658 Heater Control Lamps 2 194 Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp Rear Window Defogger and Rear Wash Wipe Soundbar Dome Lamp is sa ae dms 912 Bulbs only available from authorized dealer Exterior Lights Bulb Type backup Lap cista ope RS TRE AE ees 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 1 LED EOS LA 45 eE dL ON HEG PSX24W Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 2 3157 Front Side Marker Lamps 2 9o me xs 168 Headlamps 2 arrer ae SEA ene ede eer HEER H13 Rear Stop Tail Tarn Lamps 2 oo 315 7 License Lamp es oes oR Re Wai peces gd ed 194 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under c
316. n e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek ra up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this butt
317. n Command Trac I Or Rock Trac O Operating Instructions Precautions O Shift Positions O Shifting Procedure W Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped Bl Axle Lock Tru Lok Rubicon Models ll Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect If Equipped ll On Road Driving Tips ll Off Road Driving Tips H Side Step Removal If Equipped o The Basics Of Off Road Driving O When To Use 4L Low Range D Simultaneous Brake And Throtile Operation a oie coe eee tirai 386 O Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 386 D Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points 388 seil el lol secese os dran poe OE EE 390 O Driving Through Water re hee ERGER 393 B After Driving Off Road 396 la Power Steering 05 397 O Power Steering Fluid Check x oc dace ds 398 IM Parking Brake is ae bab de dede ss 399 M Anti Lock Brake System 401 N Electronic Brake Control System 403 o Traction Control System TCS 25 v acm 404 NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 359 G Brake Assist System BAS 404 W Tires General Information 427 O Hill Start Assist HSA LLL 405 O Tite Pressure 22k habeas ot ohne gene S 427 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 408 oO Tire Inflation Pressures casse Rep Reds 428 O Electronic Stability Control ESC 409 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 429 O ESC Activation Malfunction Indicat
318. n operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Location WARNING Continued e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You compartment could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only OE Avoid ice or slippery areas 060633923 Jack Storage N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479 Spare Tire Stowage 2 Tum on the Hazard Warning flasher To remove the spare tire from the carrier remove the tire NT ROLE cover if equipped and remove the lug nuts with the lug P 5 l wrench turning them counterclockwise 4 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or a NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the EE EE EL EE spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross 5 Turn the ignition to LOCK Mii of 50 Ibs 23 kg including the weight of the spare C Tv NE N l wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing 1 Park on a firm level surfa
319. n ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles HOTOIL Transmission Temperature Warning Message The HOTOIL cluster message will appear in the odom eter accompanied with a chime to indicate that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might oc cur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this HOT OIL message turns on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the message turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture HOTOIL Warning message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING If the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warn ing message is illuminated and you continue operat ing the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id g
320. n from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants And Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System N THINGS
321. n loss of vehicle control STARTING AND OPERATING 433 Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than ra 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the 055007576 speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 434 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to li
322. n on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information It is located on the lower left part of the cluster below the speedometer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Control Buttons The Compass Temperature control buttons are located on the left spoke of the steering wheel 040834255 Compass Temperature Control Buttons Press and release the STEP button on the steering wheel to access the options in the Compass display 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving The following displays can be reset or changed e Compass Temperature AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy ET will reset display DTE distance to empty These messages can be cycled through by pressing the SIEP button on the steering wheel To reset the AVG ECO or ET press and hold the STEP button for approximately three seconds Trip Conditions Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Press and hol
323. n system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the O OFF position There are seven blower speeds Temperature Control 045607540 Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Air Direction 4 Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes 045607544 The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Panel 7 Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the
324. n to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the RKE transmitter PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is activated the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YO
325. nced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING In an accident you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause an accident that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents This feature all
326. nd reliability More freguent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHAngE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8 000 miles 13 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Instr
327. nder Light When the ignition switch is first tumed to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 8 Turn Signal Indicators lt l The left or right arrow will flash with the corre sponding exterior turn signal lights when the turn signal lever is operated A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light wi This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started if the bulb does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 10 High Beam Indicator ED This indicator shows that the high beam headlights 2 are on Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the
328. ng Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual 424 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg NS TA TING AND OPERATING 425
329. ng a hill HDC speed may be adjusted by the driver to suit the driving conditions The speed corresponds to the transmission gear selected E STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Approximate HDC Set Speed 1 mph 1 5 km h 2 5 mph 4 km h DRIVE 7 5 mph 12 km h REVERSE 1 mph 1 5 km h However the driver can override HDC operation by applying the brake to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed If more speed is desired during HDC control the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed in the usual manner When either the brake or the accelerator is released HDC will control the vehicle at the original set speed Enabling HDC 1 Shift the transfer case into 4WD LOW range Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operat ing for further information 2 Press the Hill Descent button The Hill Descent Control Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will turn on solid NOTE If the transfer case is not in 4WD LOW range the Hill Descent Control Indicator Light will flash for five seconds and HDC will not be enabled Disabling HDC 1 Press the Hill Descent button or shift the transfer case out of 4WD LOW range The Hill Descent Control Indicator light in the instrument cluster will turn off 418 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings 1 US DOT Safety Stan dards Code TIN 2 Size Designation 3 Service Description
330. ng as the switch is held Upon release the wiper will cycle two to three times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259 Rear Window Defroster If Equipped The rear window defroster button is located on the CAUTION bottom right side of the blower control knob Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster the heating elements An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth For an additional five minutes of operation press the and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to button a second time the heating elements Labels can be peeled off NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear after soaking with warm water window defroster only when the engine is operating Do not use scrapers sharp Instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface
331. ng difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the vn button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the VR button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training command You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e press the amp button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pau
332. ng the RES button If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph 2 km h To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push the SET button If the button is continually held in the SET position the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released Release the button when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph 2 km h 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maint
333. ngs Customer Programmable Features menu displays in the EVIC 3 Press the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 4 Press and release the SELECT button to start the calibration The CAL indicator will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly Compass Variance Map set the compass will automatically compensate for the 1 Turn the ignition switch ON oe and provide the most accurate compass head 2 Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxi 5 mately two seconds NOTE Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel this is where the compass sensor is located 040506040 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 3 Press the DOWN button until Compass Variance message and the last variance Zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable F
334. nse on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in floor defrost or defrost floor mode Attempting to use the recircula tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off 354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first move the Mode knob to Panel Panel Floor and then press the Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibility of window fogging Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedur
335. ntal Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to 506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of sa
336. nted Stop Lamp CHMSL The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer 1 Remove the spare tire 2 Remove the four screws holding the lens cover in place on the spare tire carrier 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539 FLUID CAPACITIES 18 5 Gallons Engine Oil with Filter o ooo o 3 8 Liter Engine 5 7 Liters Cooling System N 3 8 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 13 Ouarts 12 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs RE14PLP5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection NEE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed If Equipped ATF 4 produc
337. o Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near the top of the door using a 40 Torx head driver Four Door Only 035707391 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a 40 Torx head driver NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 2 Install the right panel first then the left panel 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 5 Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of 6 Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the rear window glass Lift the rear window glass the vehicle UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 7 Release the red locking tab by pulling outward 8 To remove the wiring harness press the tab and pull to 4 disconnect i b 035734180 035734181 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed 9 To remove the washer hose pinch the grips on hose CAUTION connector and pull The removal of the Freedom Top requires four adults located on each corner Failure to follow this caution could damage the Freedom Top Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top um 1 Ins
338. o change it Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system Voice Tree Recent Ed Calls Enter Name Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Enalish Last Number on Phone is redialed Main Menu Phonebook See Phonebook Flowchart Ea See Setup Flowchart Francais The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Uconnect Tutorial Messages Messages 030607515 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed Se Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Current Number is played Enter Location New Entry Added Entry Deleted Phonebook Cleared Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Confirmation ar EE SMS Incoming ini et Device Towing Announcement New phone Select a language will English Espanol temporaril
339. o set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Tum the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right
340. oaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 389 The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get wall and is designed to take the abuse Always look caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed your tires dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench CAUTION you just created at a 45 degree angle e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large WARNING enough to strike your axles or undercarriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing enough to contact the door sills an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing A Ravine Gully Ditch Washout Or Rut Crossing Logs When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle log Whil
341. ock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Control ESC Trailer Sway Control TSC and Hill Descent Control HDC All of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving condi tions and are commonly referred to as ESC WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle nor can they increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 404 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to th
342. ocks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Eguipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting thi
343. ode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the vehicle with the shift lever in the PARK position vehicle can also be started in NEUTRAL Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start NS TA TING AND OPERATING 363 within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 7
344. of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS B Instrument Panel Features 264 W Electronic Vehicle Information Center Mi Instrument Cluster 265 EVIC E Equipped asosa eee ER DREK KA mE O Electronic Vehicle Information Center W Instrument Cluster Descriptions 266 EVIC Displays o o eee onnan 288 WM Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped 280 EIL Chance Reguired sa nee a 9 3 ton DE 289 O Control Buttons lens 281 sitio EancloHs dys aspere RE e Rea 290 El DiE SREIUDIS oie s39PSRITPPeWATs 282 4 Compass Display ECO H Compass Temperature Display 283 Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped 291 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 294 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo N Media Center 730N 430 430N RHR RER Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer RBZ RHB CD DVD HDD NAV MP3 WMA AUX Jacks ss tare hehe a4 Rm 297 IBGUIDDEU siese sie HAS 4 Xv aH PRU ES 316 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 297 O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped 316 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 305 D Operating Instructions TM 1 C Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files op oa ELE oe aise Button ll Media Center 130 Sales Code RES
345. oline Oxygenate Blends 445 DG Common Towing Definitions 453 H E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 445 O Trailer Hitch Classification 456 OMMT In Gasoline sis ered eee RE DEd 446 O Trailer Towing Weights E Materials Added To Fuel AAG Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings 457 NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 361 O Trailer And Tongue Weight 461 W Recreational Towing Wiowine Red bemenis euro restes pen ones A62 Behind Motorhome Etc 469 o Towing This Vehicle Behind ae DIS 2 eae EER ER RE N Someta 207 Another Vehicle 2446404 ei ae dee s 469 H Recreational Towing Four Wheel Drive Models 362 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING Never leave children in the vehicle alone Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons The child or others could be seriously or fatally injured The child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Four Wheel Drive Models Only In 4L m
346. on Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 fo
347. on NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to systems can result in civil penalties being assessed overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or against you some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 448 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued NS TA TING AND OPERATING 449 ADDING
348. on completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have a collision Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differential automati cally proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction 380 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle AXLE LOCK TRU LOKS RUBICON MODELS The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column Axle Lock Switch ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the
349. on manual transmission vehicle 2 Start the engine 3 With the engine running the brake applied and the clutch out rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclock wise from center 4 Press the ESC OFF switch four times within twenty seconds 5 Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light will blink sev eral times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 7 to re enable HSA functionality Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu vers Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 409 driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESC system is in
350. on once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows You to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button t
351. on to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Vanity Mirrors Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors To use the mirrors rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites o www chrysler com uconnect Vanity Mirror e www dodge com uconnect Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al e or call 1 877 855 8400 lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your e www jeep com uconnect 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE E Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer call
352. ons Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Power Disc Brakes Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder With disc brakes 516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in has been in a tightly closed container Keep the Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times WARNING e Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle f
353. or Light ARadal ly Ties xo us sioe d han ee DR SS US 430 And ESC Off Indicator Light 414 EL EE Ne Ee oue EL Tiailer Sway Control TSC 4k rr PRE 415 And Wheel Ir Equipped ect R RR o Hill Descent Control HDC If Equipped 416 CO Compact Spare Tire If Equipped N Tire Safety Information 418 O Full Size Spare If Equipped 432 Ere Mathis ss 9 6625 thang 3444 eee 418 D Limited Use Spare If Equipped 432 O Tire Identification Number TIN 421 Tie PINS eq oes ana ede oh ee a 433 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 422 O Tread Wear Indicators sis eri ian eee t 433 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 423 DUGO VIE PPP 434 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id AReplacement TOSS s 2s SERE LARR RENE ss 434 Fuel System Cautions 244 reritraec RA 447 Mite Chains SO HE DER RT ED 436 O Carbon Monoxide Warnings 448 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 457 W Adding Duel sobres Rees 449 Mi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 438 o Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap use 449 A Dase SIE uos Sues o rirani EE ED A ORE 441 H Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 450 E General Information 293 99233 DERE 443 WM Vehicle Loading 451 W Fuel Requirements 424 Ere WE RE deed 444 El ertikieslien Label 22s 20a KAAR ERAS ee 451 D Reformulated Gasoline 444 W Trailer Towing 0008 453 B Gas
354. or further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts
355. or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classic Rock Cls Rock Foreign Language 330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Program Type 16 Digit Character Display By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency station with the same s
356. or light is on Overdrive is locked out Pressing the switch a second STARTING AND OPERATING 373 time restores the Overdrive function The lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load If the transmission overheats a HOTOIL message may be displayed in the odometer accompanied by a chime sound If the HOTOIL message turns on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the message turns off WARNING If the Transmission Temperature HOTOIL Warn ing Message is illuminated and you continue operat ing the vehicle in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 374 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION CAUTION Continuing to drive with the Transmission Tempera e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering Wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise damage to the steering column or shift lever could ture HOTOIL Warning Message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure result 2 Second Never race the engine with the brakes on and the This range is used for moderate grades and to assist vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow The incline without applying the brakes These prac vehic
357. or the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the
358. orted by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will reco
359. owing Without The Ignition Key Fob Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle 492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id Four Wheel Drive Models CAUTION The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground Acceptable methods are to tow the e Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised Internal damage to the transmission or transfer and the opposite end on a towing dolly case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing Failure to follow these towing methods could If flatbed equipment is not available and the transfer case is operable the vehicle may be towed in the forward io direction with ALL wheels on the ground IF the result in damage to the transmission and or trans transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in ter EA Such damage is not covered by the New PARK for automatic transmissions or in gear NOT in Vehicle Limited Warranty NEUTRAL for manual transmissions Refer to Recre ational Towing in Starting And Operating for detailed instructions MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS N Engine Compartment 3 8L 495 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD IH 496 O Loose Fu
360. ows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in an accident the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In an accident people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your e Two people should never be belted into a single vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat seat belt People belted together can crash into one belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions your body These are the strongest parts of your 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and body and can take the forces of a collision the best adjust the seat Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in an accident much worse You 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front might suffer internal injuries or you could even Seat and next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch slide out of part of the belt Follow these instruc Plate and pull out the belt
361. pE L AU ocn OF PLUMA MPLLI SENARTGNUMSNT Am rs HOE ME Ow MESS HR PON Sis WER TIUN oti6910 94A 010308790 Rollover Warning Label 6 INTRODUCTION NN Id Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 7 i Ve De Ae a eo 11 WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WEER EXTERIOR BULD TURN RON ALE ap rel ELECTRONIC Sera Wires INTERMITTENT FAILURE pra SPFED CONTROL ASSIST mm mm TY OF ZD gt i I ae EB X Q 0 0 e Fue REAN WINDOW woan D MASTER LIGHTING FORM cunt a or LOWER EX BEAT WINDOW LIFT nv a HILL DESCENT Wa Se PARSING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH CONTROL BUC Aart Da f FUEL ALL Se REAA WWOOW WINOSHIBLD WASHER DOME LIGHT FROMT FOG LIGHT HOOD RELEASE LOW
362. pect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary 035734182 10 Close the swing gate 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order 11 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 The e The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body CAUTION should be torqued to 66 in Ib 22 in lb 7 5 N m Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior 2 5 N m water damage stains or mildew e Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior e t is not necessary to pinch connection when reinstall ing washer hose Push on until click is heard DOOR FRAME Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame s may damage the seals causing water WARNING to leak into the vehicle s interior Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door The door frame s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEA
363. people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and i hit using a seat belt properly Folding Rear Seat In a collision you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure that the seats 4 Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and are fully latched firmly lock the seat into position 3 Return the seat to the normal position 1 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3 under Fold And Tumble Rear Seat in this section UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 2 Press down on the release bar on each side and pull Replacing The Rear Seat Two Door Models the seat out and away from the lower bracket Reverse the steps for removing the seat 3 Remove the seat zm the Mise WARNING e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folded down or removed from the ve hicle e The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and st
364. period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave an unattended child in the vehicle 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME All three rear seating positions of the four door model have lower anchorages that are capable of acco
365. phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Only the mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone also allows the user to download entries one at a time from their phone via Bluetooth
366. pplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbag during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position front occu pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a Advanced Front Passenger Airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi tion Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be shoulder belt behind them or under their arm modified to accommodate a disabled per
367. r OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the gualified service person nel special tools and eguipment to perform all service Operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WAR
368. r it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water first The key to any crossing is low and slow Shift into first gear manual transmission or DRIVE auto matic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion 394 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION e Water ingestion into the axles transmission trans fer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at a depth of 30 inches 76 cm at speeds no greater than 5 mph 8 km h Water ingestion can occur causing damage to your vehicle Before You Cross Any Type Of Water As you approach any type of water you need to deter mine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If neces sary get out and walk through the
369. re not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with Child Protection Door Lock system To engage or disengage the Child Protection Door Lock system 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door Child Protection Door Lock Function 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Protection locks are engaged NOTE For emergency e
370. rear Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347 e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or panel floor Recirculation Control Pressing the Recirculation Control button
371. rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations 382 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer column sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal 4 driving conditions WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main taining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and
372. rear shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two portion of the deck folds am 036007404 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 17 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch 18 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted disengage Repeat this step on the other side brake light Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along the door frame track to the rear door frame NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 19 Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track 21 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps and lower the top down into the vehicle provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera body tion 20 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the 22 Close the front header latches bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion 23 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle Frame in this section for further information 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNENEEEEE Putting Up The Soft Top NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be help
373. rent road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types o
374. res for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service If the transmission and drivetrain are operable disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under Recreational Towing in the Starting And Operating section Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground 4WD MODELS See instructions under Recreational Towing e Auto Irans in PARK Flat Tow e Manual Trans in gear NOT in Neutral e T case in NEUTRAL e Tow in forward direction sci iii Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491 Proper towing or lifting eguipment is reguired to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other eguipment designed for this purpose following eguip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws applying to vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN position not the ACC position CAUTION e Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position not the LOCK position T
375. rly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge 036005872 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side 12 To install the side windows affix the window tem channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear porarily by attaching it to the Velcro in the upper rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm roof bow 4 bow will aid in reaching the channel with the retainers 036007402 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 13 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends bar over the receiver at th
376. rn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected 045607559 e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode ten minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the LED in the control button to illumi nate After ten minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled e In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in the floor defrost or defrost floor mode in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to conde
377. rs store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury e Do not drive your vehicle on road with the wind shield down Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253 Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark 3 the original locations prior to removing e 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering lt 819292b7 3 Remove the sun visor 4 Remove the A pillar cap 5 Disconnect microphone if equipped with uconnect phone 6 Open the sport bar Velcro covering 254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION 7 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar and one hex bolt Do not remove the head impact foam from the side 13 mm on top of the side bar bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping NOTE PU side bar out ed d dodi 8 Remove the side
378. rst sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 88 000 miles 143 000 km M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 553 96 000 Miles 156 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule LL LLL O C C C C L L L Li Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate the tires rotate at the first sign of irregular wear even if it occurs before 96 000 miles 156 000 km Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the ignition cables Replace the spark plugs Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary F Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Inspect the front and rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather
379. ructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between and Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near 4 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near
380. runs out of fuel Adding a EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis played To reset all resettable functions press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func tion reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of eight compass readings and the outside tempera ture NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature r
381. rward direction Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case Automatic transmissions must be placed in the PARK position for recreational towing Continued CAUTION Continued e Manual transmissions must be placed in gear not in Neutral for recreational towing Before recreational towing perform the procedure outlined under Shifting Into NEUTRAL to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL Otherwise internal damage will result Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and or transfer case damage Damage from improper tow ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be damaged ee STARTING AND OPERATING 471 Shifting Into Neutral N CAUTION Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the 2 Turn OFF the engine parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position 5 discs ce both the front and rear er od from PIGEURSSUIQOLUIOIU EE Dede the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move 4 Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or even if the transmission i
382. s as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the GVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the VR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations Prompts On Setup Confirmations Prompts Off Phone and
383. s Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339 bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Ouality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent receptio
384. s a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 WARNING e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death To Enter Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e T
385. s between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other with out wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if R equipped will contain the two control buttons Uconnect Phone amp e button and Voice Command vn button that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE
386. s in PARK The parking depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle the transfer case is fully in N Neutral before recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Bring the vehicle to a complete stop 5 Shift the transfer case lever into N Neutral 6 Start the engine 7 Shift the transmission into REVERSE 472 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id 8 Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal on manual CAUTION transmissions for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear N Neutral and the engine running With the trans fer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is OFF 10 Turn OFF the engine and leave the ignition switch in prior to shifting the transmission into PARK the unlocked OFF position 11 Firmly apply the parking brake T dea the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable 12 Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear NOT in Neutral Ite Release no pane prae 15 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it away from the negative battery post NNS TA TING AND OPERATING 473 Shifting Out of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehic
387. s item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Audio DRC If Eguipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton
388. s tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON RUN and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single C
389. ser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display ECO EE AE kes Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator On dODE S uae pasta ard TX ES UR ERES Door Ajar dd RENEE Liftgate Ajar LOW UXE 666 0446 4005e6 m Low Tire Pressure HOTOIL Transmission Oil Temperature Above Normal Limits BASCAE oa sees dus BRA ee Fuel Cap Fault noFUSE SS SS SS Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required ESPOEFE oos bees odes Pe bes ESP Deactivated ECO ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 The ECO display will toggle betwee
390. si tions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock ALR ALR e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a Child Restraint tether strap 022633863 Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 i 022633862 Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEH
391. side or outside of a vehicle In a collision people Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system
392. sing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 8007 must e low road noise eight _ eight h be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred e smooth road surface e You can say O letter O for 0 zero fully closed windows e Even though international dialing for most number a were ue e dry weather conditions and combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e operation from
393. son contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child Vaca ead EE seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints Xue Se e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more You should read the instructions provided with your dup dial D f severe injuries in a collision The airbags work child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly with your seat belt to restrain you properly In 2 All occupants should always use their lap and shoul some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all der belts properly Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Continued Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel If the
394. st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door Ist Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When on is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When on is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until On or Off appears Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped DVD v
395. steer POWER STEERING ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time The standard power steering system will give you good This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability system This noise should be considered normal and it in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical does not in any way damage the steering system steering capability if power assist is lost au m WARNING If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi Continued operation with reduced power steering tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during Service should be obtained as soon as possible parking maneuvers 398 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check WARNING Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined Fluid level should be checked on a level sur
396. stem In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If A Deployment Occurs The front airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye collisions This does not mean something is wrong with irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or the airbag system throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abra sions are similar to friction rope burns or those you mi
397. system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on 1 ON OFF 2 RES when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally 4 CANCEL CS SET setthe system or cause it to go faster than you want NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec You could lose control and have a collision Always tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut leave the system OFF when you are not using it down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 To Set a Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RES button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushi
398. t Manual Transmission MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the re If Equipped quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 226 RBI Model 44 MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Maintenance Schedule 544 O Required Maintenance Intervals 545 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 544 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance a
399. t will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value 440 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire equipment tires and wheels The TPMS pressures failure or condition have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replace ment equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nan
400. t If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down 252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EM WARNING Continued e Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on road driving Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and securely fastened either up or down off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at or folded down all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents If you remove the doo
401. t Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T 5 Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control 432 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id Full Size Spare If Eduipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the original eq
402. t follows for details EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351 Automatic Temperature Control Operation Operation How Blower Control The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than io any air outside or A C on or olf Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable A C on or olf 81412736 352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN
403. t to climb a hill on an angle Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely ee STARTING AND OPERATING 391 recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident shift the trans mission into a lower gear with 4L Low engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to
404. tAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON RUN or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has
405. tach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a 130 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip the sport bar covers X WA 035605928 b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward c Reattach the knuckles onto the metal pivot brackets 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE To aid in reattaching the knuckles you may carefully tap on the knuckles using a rubber mallet CAUTION d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a 130 Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug screws if they are overtightened being careful not to cross thread the screws or over tighten 5 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is FREEDOM TOP THREE PIECE MODULAR not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top HARD TOP IF EGUIPPED 6 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover CAUTION O should be discarded It was intended as a protective OLON cover for shipping only e The hard top is not designed to carry any addi tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build ing hunting or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a struct
406. tall the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Latch Anchorages Two Door Models Latch Anchorages Four Door Models 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat a 02263386 A 022633862 P Tether Strap Mounting Four Door Models Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the
407. tch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob t
408. tem will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 27 OID Overdrive Off Indicator Light 0 0 This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off The O D OFF button is located on the center console 28 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front SWAY sway bar is disconnected BAR 29 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped a This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con e trol ESC is off OFF 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN 30 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Contro
409. the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to Electronic Stability Control ESC for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road conditions and driving conditions influence the chance that Wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Roll Miti gation ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESC corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by apply ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appro priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position 410 STARTING AND OPERATING NN Id
410. the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two cold lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 82 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Special Additives
411. the top 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side ubi 4 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 036007403 250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 5 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown the header on top of the rear portion of the deck Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 036007404 6 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle 036207426 SS EE Closing the Sunrider Perform the above steps in the opposite order NOTE Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rearview mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251 FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then los
412. this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re tractor ALR feature or any other seat belt func tion is not working properly when checked ac cording to the procedures in the Service Manual Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an accident These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in an accident Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child
413. tine Procedure 323 226 KEER RE e053 49 wc Oe 199 el eise ou ase gest SEED RE eee ru prion 134 Eie EE A PC 137 Fold and Tumble Rear isa vad obra deg ao ed 143 Head Ies IPTE eua i iso eeepc Spe SORS KOS 141 la cuc Errem 140 H igbl ACjUSUNEDL 2 242 ive Ee CR d eed 135 Rear Tollie varoucece pea ees eed ves 145 Removal sies do RE er ded Genes 144 145 elek Release T a he fee op aa Oe es 136 il 22332992099 21 914A ee OER 136 Securty Against Thell as sp reme 9 aos awed 18 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 18 DSlCCHOM OL OM 462 47 e4e eb aceeheeanagee es 501 peniry Key minobilizei segs as WER GRA re RED on 15 Sentry Key Programming 3444 6 664 2490540 S 17 Sentry Key Replacement 4225464055050 55 5444 16 sale GE te 24 0 9 Fag SE BE eS 561 Service Contract 4 444 644 3 9 9 RE XU ER S 54084 563 Service Manuals eee eee 565 Pelle bie LIE ases SSA BEER De 298 318 327 Deltiigs Personal a o costes Rex es hee ew SA 294 Shift Lever Override s ua xa ors wg usos RR Ne 489 sir rrr m 369 Automatic Transmission LL 370 Manual Transmission SS SS SEE Es 365 Transfer Case Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N SS SS SS Se 471 Transfer Case Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 4s soe Pe eben RR 473 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 50 Sho lder Belts ii EE EER e ROLE ARE EG 43 DIGG AIL DAG C 64 Side Window Demisters Defrost
414. tinued 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information on replacement tires and for proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carry ing capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake control
415. tion Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Spare Front Heated Seat M1 15 Amp Center High Mounted Yellow Blue Stop Light CHMSL M9 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat Switch Stop Lamp Feed Yellow If Equipped 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow Vehicle Entertainment 5ystem Satellite Digital Audio Receiver SDARS DVD Hands Free Module RADIO Natural If Equipped rage Door Opener Van Yellow 5ensor M11 10 Amp Ignition Off Draw Cli Yellow BATT ACC SELECT Underhood Lamp E m M2 20 Amp Relay Trailer Lighting M10 Yellow Stoplamp M3 20 Amp Frt Rear Axle Locker Yellow Rela 532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse M12 30 Amp Amplifier M16 10 Amp Airbag Module Green Red 1 M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw M17 5 Amp Left Tail License Park Yellow Cabin Compartment Blue Lamp Node Wireless Control M18 15 Amp Right Tail Park Run function Control Switch M19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down M14 20 Amp Trailer Tow Natural ASD 1 and 2 Yellow Export Only M20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment M15 20 Amp Climate Control Sys Blue Node Interior Light Yellow tem Rear View Mirror Switch Bank oa M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down Node Transfer Case Yellow ASD 3 Switch Multi Function Control Switch Tire NE 10 Amp Right Horn HI LOW Pressure Monitor Glow Red Plug Module Export ME 10 Amp Left Horn HI LOW Diesel Only R
416. tion you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this Owner s Manual concern ing vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition 454 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includ
417. tion With Rear Hard Top Removed D Rear Hard Top Removal O Rear Hard Top Installation B Door Frame O Door Frame Removal o Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 170 O Door Frame Installation Lour Door Model 2 d d dried dried cbe d 189 ll Soft Top Two Door Models 192 D Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top 194 D Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top 196 O Lowering The Soft Top xat PRED 199 O Raising The Soft lop 1429 are 4 DR Rs 208 N Soft Top Four Door Models 217 O Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 220 D Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 225 o Folding Down The Soft Tops sies e RE 226 O Putting Up The oft Top seats ex ree 236 NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 ll Sunrider Two Door Models li Bduipped tee este os 245 Opening The Sunrider 42 e qo s eos 246 Closing The Sunrider ss ek ERLA weds 248 N Sunrider Four Door Models IP SQUID DEG si bes been sae ghee ate ee DA 248 HOpenine Wie Sunrider 2e vue ER Dis mes 249 Closing The Sunrider 4 024644 KERE 291 ll Folding Windshield O Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars O Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars ll Rear Window Features Hard Top Only o Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped D Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN Id MIRRORS Inside D
418. tion at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511 CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine cool ant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper system in an emergency it should be replaced with maintenance intervals the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as Selection Of Engine Coolant possible Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants
419. tion you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the we button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number
420. to the floor mat fasteners rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable e Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter fering with the pedals or the ability to control the Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING vehicle Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Al ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury Continued Continued NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 WARNING Continued e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well while the vehicle is moving Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control If reguired mounting posts must be properly installed if not equipped
421. ton is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between P playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped e VES Lock L
422. tuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed CAUTION EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are vehicle stranded off road Do not use tow hooks for mounted in the front and the rear tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever 1 Firmly set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition to the ON RUN position without starting the engine 3 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully remove the shift lever override access cover located on the PRNDL bezel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver or similar tool reach into the opening and press and hold the shift lever override 6 Move the shift lever into NEUTRAL 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 8 Reinstall the shift lever override access cover 490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NN Id TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedu
423. uipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result i
424. ular Hard Top ai account doh dich vob DA pur 173 Monitor Tire Pressure System ss se sesse 438 NIODAE E dI S sasie sd EX Saree tes RD AE 498 564 MTIBE ETBE 1 234940 GEE x de nai n Ee seke 445 Multi Function Control Lever 148 New Vehicle Break In Period 83 Occupant Restraints avs ced gece ea N N fae 41 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 444 Odometer ee eee 274 280 Tp cae veg GE ee eee Gee PES 272 274 280 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 384 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 384 Oil Change Indicator um HAWER EE iesi 276 289 Oil Change Indicator Reset si 444434280545 276 289 SN Pr eee BED ERA Hens DAE 500 Capacity TT 599 Canceled oprieme erii panii 289 DIP E oprea 500 In eee OE ETE ET 502 leen LOGO ane 2s HERDER ri HE DI 501 Materials Added to 23 2 ERA dr REB dE 502 Pressure Warne Licht 1ovmesseet veeriev 267 Recommendation s 501 539 po RT 501 539 OU Piesure LIOM 2 302 81 9 ETE ER DEAD ERA 4 267 Onboard Diagnostic System 496 497 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 95 Oie Engl s scia ER ves kiiin 271 476 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 565 N INDEX 581 Palmitate SEER ORREL IESER ae ee he 522 Pant Damase 4669 4b EDE Pur NR EH eA 522 Panic NE io AAR AAR AT ON OE EE REA 23 Parking Drake 2x3 ee eiger E OPUS 1 gee oe 399 Pae CO a a 9999 2
425. ument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odometer in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 545 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct N ti e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a do fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level Af Each Oil Change while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Change the engine oil filter e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if e Check the manual transmission fluid level required Once a Month CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals Required Maintenance Intervals as required Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed 546 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 8 000 Miles 13 000 km or 16 000 Miles 26 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule Change the engine
426. ural NOTE A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly the Soft Top in this section carry any additional loads other than environmen tal rain snow etc Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside or fully removed 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel must be removed before removing Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior right panel water damage stains or mildew e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to panel removal Removing the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior The hard top assembly must be positioned prop 1 Fold down the sun visor and move it to the side 2 Turn the rear fasteners knobs located on the over head speaker bar assembly counterclockwise until they can be removed erly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicles interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior
427. ure 388 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE Id CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using A Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through Crossing Large Rocks When appr
428. ure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection Emergencies for further information The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep varies considerably Only high quality filters should be flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air a booster battery or any other booster source with cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable recommended clamps to touch each other Maintenance Free Battery Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery after handling You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required 504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN id CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable damps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting volta
429. used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command vr button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command VR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup R
430. ut the heating elements OFF N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from WARNING Continued two to one indicating the change The LOW level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 30 min Do not place anything on the seat that insulates utes against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a NOTE When a heat setting is selected heat will be felt poat ibat bae MES EE conl d FEE Ode within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat CAUTION Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the haustion or other physical condition must exercise seat care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Continued by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop
431. va oux koe EE EED HA riki 538 Theft Alarm Security Alarm uie 4 n dero 270 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 272 Tel Control Ge a oe oon rres dex ds 414 Turn Signal ee ee ee ee 87 149 267 536 538 Vol EE asse sag apes ee ADRES eae EF nth 266 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 266 Loading VOICI TR 451 Wiles 1232924392499 32 9 212 02 92 9 4 22 8 908 423 LOCKING ri PLC RA EER RDL EN 360 Locks Child Protection uu a9 a X REDE Iob XR 37 DOOR E gen 6h suet OR RES Eq ER SE EE RE 33 Power Door A P 34 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CAID MAAN N EE FO KG 74 76 BUNICA body fence wees eet aan HR ees 505 Wiaintenance Bree battery aus wies gie de EE n 503 Maintenance Procedures SE 499 Maintenance Schedule 544 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 277 497 Manual Service our seed es veces Eee 565 Manual Transmission 365 520 Fluid Level Mio ARUERTRTESILTTSTTOI OT T 520 Lubricant Selection 4 sv m RR tus 520 Junkers E 4 Re eee a oe ap Do 367 Master Cylinder Brakes xax uw RE DER 515 Methanol enn 445 Mini Irip Compiler socos seg pt oo ris 280 290 MIOS se sies bo ee eee PE eee eee 94 Electric Powered 4 64 st 40446664 EERS RE 96 Electric Remote 580 INDEX NEE id OUE EE 55645 oe bee ee et EE ORE OR 95 RearvieW AAR OES EER OT FEE 94 VERE x3 v9 d PIN REEDE TM O ROER RE 96 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 9 Mod
432. vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain the engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515 WARNING e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissi
433. vehicle has Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB they also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat NOTE After any accident the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags is required in a frontal or side collision Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Airbags SAB if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
434. ven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard STARTING AND OPERATING 423 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loadi
435. wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 568 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE NN Id Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life
436. wer inverter outlet off NOTE When the power inverter switch is pressed there will be a delay of approximately one second before the inverter indicator light turns ON WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console li M E 035033676 Rear Cupholders STORAGE 935133687 Console Storage Compartment Front Cupholders To lock or unlock the storage compartment insert the Rear Cupholders ignition key and turn To open the storage compartment The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center press the latch and lift the cover console 2 f 4 d Center Console Rear Storage Compartment The rear cargo area storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage compartment cover use the following procedure NOTE The rear storage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 1 Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees so it is parallel to the
437. when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513 Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the en gine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authoriti
438. wice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle 342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel Reach behind the wheel to access the switches 045033001 Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available AM FM SAT CD HDD AUX VES etc The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in
439. will c put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are pres ent Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate After ten minutes the sys tem will return to normal mode function and the LED will turn off NOTE e Continuous use of the recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e The use of the recirculation mode in cold or damp weather will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select the Outside Air position for maximum defogging e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled Air Conditioning Control T 045607557 Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning System is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer tem peratures 348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage Automatic Temperature Control ATC until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds If Equipped e MAX A C For maximum cooling turn on the A C and
440. wing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration KO nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on w
441. ww seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be eguipped with a tether strap having a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not L
442. www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 966 e Seroice Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal m
443. xists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id 24 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button for additional information U S Federal regulations reguire that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purcha
444. xit with the system engaged move the rocker lever rearward unlocked position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle WINDOWS Power Window Switches Power Windows If Equipped The top left switch controls the left front window and the The power window switches are located on the instru OP right switch controls the right front window ment panel below the radio Press the switch downward NOTE The switches will continue to function for up to to open the window and upward to close the window two minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a front door is opened NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Four Door Models The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull up on the switch briefly To partially open the window press halfway to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop Window Lockout Switch Four Door Models The window lockout switch located between the front w
445. y Toggle List Phones Confirmation Prompts on off Say 4 digit System Lists pin code Phones or Francais override phone priorities List Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Primar e O C G Voice Commands Primar call cancel confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit emergenc English erase all Espanol Francais help home NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Voice Commands Primar language send 0000 0 o 000000 0 0 list names list phones towing assistance a mute off new entr transfer call n Uconnect Tutorial try again aaa veo nt ee pager mobile N set up phone settings or phone phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again o redial 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the eguipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation V
446. y Mode Belus No function Dolbye Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN Id Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general inform
447. y communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter 446 STARTING AND OPERATING NEE id e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT has shown to reduce sparkplug life and reduce emission system p

2011 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents